CHAPTER I

PART OF SPEECH AND SENTENCE STRUCTURE

I. PART OF SPEECH

You should read this chapter if you need to review or learn about

 Adjectives
 Adverb
 Conjunctions
 Interjections
 Nouns
 Prepositions
 Pronouns
 Verbs

In this chapter you’ll review part of speech so that you have a standard way to
describe how words are put together to create meaning. The parts of speech are arranged in
alphabetic order for easy reference. In later chapters, you will learn how to correct errors
caused by misusing these parts of speech.

Get Started

English is a very flexible language. A word’s meaning is derived not only from how it is
spelled and pronounced but also from how it is used in a sentence. As you review the parts of
speech, remember that the way a word is used in a sentence determines which part of speech
it is. For example:

Noun : I ate a fish for dinner

Verb : We fish in the lake on every Tuesday

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 1
A. Adjectives

Adjectives are words that describe nouns and pronouns. Adjectives answer the
questions: What kind? How much? Which one? How many? For example:

What kind? red nose gold ring

How much? more sugar little effort
Which one? second chance those chocolates
How many? Several chances six books

There are five kinds of adjectives: common adjectives, proper adjectives, compound
adjectives, articles, and indefinite adjectives.
1. Common adjectives describe nouns or pronouns.
Strong man
Green plant
Beautiful view

2. Proper adjectives are formed from proper nouns.

California vegetables ( from the noun “ California”)
Mexican food (from the noun “ Mexico”)

3. Compound adjectives are made up of more than one word.

Far off country
Teenage person

4. Articles are special type of adjective. There are three articles: a, an, the.
The is called a “definite article” because it refers to a specific thing.
A and an are called “ indefinite article” because they refer to general things. Use a
with consonant sounds; use an before vowel sounds.

5. Indefinite adjectives don’t specify the specific amount of something.

all another any both
each either few many
more most neither other
several some

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 2
 Follow these guidelines when you use adjectives:

1. Use an adjective to describe a noun or a pronoun

Jesse was unwilling to leave the circus.
noun adj adj. noun
2. Use vivid adjectives to make your writing more specific and descriptive.
Take a larger slice of the luscious cake.
adj. noun adj. noun
3. Use an adjective after a linking verb. A linking verb connects a subject with a
descriptive word. The most common linking verbs are be ( is, am , are was, were
and so on), seem, appear, look, feel, smell, sound, taste, become, grow, remain,
stay, turn.
Chicken made this tastes more delicious ( not deliciously)

Quick Tip

Predicate adjectives are adjectives separated from the noun or pronoun by a linking verb.
Predicate adjectives describe the subject of the sentence.

The weather was cold all week.

B. Adverbs

Adverbs are words that describe verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs. Adverbs answer
the question: When? Where? How? Or To what extent?
When? Left yesterday begin now
Where? Fell below move up
How? Happily sang danced badly
To what extent? Partly finished eat completely

Most adverbs are formed by adding –ly to an adjective. For example :

Adjective Adverb

Quick Quickly
Careful Carefully
Accurate Accurately

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 3
 Here are some of the most common non – ly adverbs:

Afterward almost already also back

Even far fast hard here
How late long low more
Near never next now often
Quick rather slow soon still
Then today tomorrow too when
Where yesterday

Follow these guidelines when you use adverbs:

1. Use an adverb to describe verb.
Experiments using dynamite must be done carefully
Verb adv.
2. Use an adverb to describe an adjective.
Sam had an unbelievably huge appetite for chips
Adv. Adj.
3. Use an adverb to describe another adverb.
They sang so clearly
Adv. Adv

Quick Tip
Conjunctive adverbs are used to connect other words and to link ideas and paragraph.
Accordingly again also beside
Consequently finally for example furthermore
However Indeed Moreover on the other hand
Otherwise nevertheless Then therefore

C. Conjunctions

Conjunctions connect words or groups of words and show how the world related.
There are three kinds of conjunctions: Coordinating conjunctions, correlative
conjunctions, and subordinating conjunctions.

1. Coordinating conjunctions link similar words or words of groups. There are seven
coordinate conjunctions:
For and nor but or yet so

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 4
Quick Tip
Use this mnemonic to help you remember the seven coordinate conjunctions : FANBOYS
(for, and, nor, but, or, yet, so)

2. Correlative conjunctions also similar words or words groups, but they are always
used in pairs. Here are the correlative conjunctions :
Both…….... and either…….or
Neither…….nor not only….but also whether……or

3. Subordinating conjunctions link an independent clause ( complete sentence) to a

dependent clause (fragment). Here are the most often used subordinating
conjunctions:
after although as as if
as long as as soon as as though because
before even though if in order that
since so that though till
unless until when whenever
where wherever

D.Interjections
Interjections show strong emoticon. Since interjections are not linked grammatically
to other words in the sentence. They are set off from the rest of the sentence with comma
or an exclamation mark. For example:
 Oh! What a shock you give me with that gorilla suit.
 Wow! That’s not a gorilla suit!

E. Nouns
A noun is a word that names a person, place, or thing. Noun come in these
varieties: common nouns, proper nouns, compound nouns, and collective nouns .
1. Common nouns name any of a class of person, place or thing.
girl city food

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 5
 2. Proper nouns name a specific person, place, or thing. Proper nouns are always
capitalized.
Barbara New York City Rice-a-Rony
3. Compound nouns are two or more nouns that function as a single unit. A
compound noun can be two individual words, words joined by a hyphen, or two
words combined.
Individual words : time capsule
Hyphenated words: great-uncle
Combined words : basketball
4. Combined nouns name groups of people or things.

Audience Family herd crowd

A. Possessive nouns
In grammar, Possession nouns shows ownership. Follow this rules to create
possessive nouns.
1. With singular nouns, add an apostrophe and s
Dog  dog’s bone
singer  singer’s voice
2. With plural nouns ending in s, add an apostrophe after the s.
Dog  dogs’ bone
singer  singers’ voice
3. With plural nouns not ending in s, add an apostrophe and an s.
Men  men’s books
Mice mice’s tails
B. Plural Nouns
Here are the guidelines for creating plural nouns.
1. Add s to form the plural of most nouns.
Cat  cats computer  computers
2. Add es if the noun ends in s, sh, ch or x
Wish  wishes inch inches box  boxes
3. If a noun ends in consonant –y , change the y to i and es.
City cities lady ladies

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 6
 4. If a nouns ends in vowel –y add s. words ending in –quy don’t follow this rule
( as in soliloquies)
Essay essays monkey monkeys

F. Prepositions
Prepositions link a noun or pronoun following it to another word in sentence. Use this
chart to help you recognize some of the most common prepositions:
About Above across after Against along
Amid Around as at Before behind
Below Beneath beside between beyond but
by Despite down during Except for
From In inside into Like near
on Onto of off opposite out
Outside Over past since through to
toward Under underneath until Upon with
A noun or pronoun always follows a preposition. A prepositional phrase is a
preposition and its object. A prepositional phrase can be two or three words long.
On the wing in the door
However prepositional phrases also can be much longer, depending on the length
of the preposition and the number of words that describe the object of the preposition.
Near the violently swaying oak trees
On account of his nearly depleted bank account

G. Pronouns
A pronoun is a word used in place of a noun or another pronoun. Pronouns help you
avoid unnecessary repetition in your writing and speech. A pronoun gets its meaning
from the noun its stands for. The noun is called the antecedent.
Although Seattle is damp, it is my favorite city.
antecedent pronoun
There are different kinds of pronouns. Most of them have antecedents, but a few do
not.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 7
Quick Tip
The word antecedents comes from a Latin word meaning “ to go before.” However, the noun
does not have to appear before the pronoun in the sentence. It often does, though, to keep
sentences clear and avoid raise readings.

1. Personal pronouns refer to a specific person, place, and thing

Singular Plural
First person I, me, mine, my We, us, our, ours
Second person You, your, yours You, your, yours
Third person He, him, his, she, her, They, them, their,
hers, it theirs, its.

2. Possessive pronouns show ownership. The possessive pronouns are: your, yours,
hers, his, its, ours, their, theirs, whose.
Is this beautiful plant yours?
Yes, it’s ours.

Quick Tip
Don’t confuse personal with contractions. Personal pronouns never have an apostrophe, while
contraction always has an apostrophe. Use this chart:
Pronoun Contractions
Your You’re (you are)
Its It’s (it is)
Their They’re ( they are)
Whose Who’s (who is)

3. Reflexive pronouns add information to a sentence by pointing back to a noun or

pronoun near the beginning of the sentence. Reflexive pronouns end in –self or
selves.
Tricia bought herself a new car
All her friend enjoyed themselves riding in the beautiful car.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 8
 4. Intensive pronouns also end in –self or selves but just add emphasis to the noun or
pronoun.
Tricia herself picks out the car.
5. Demonstrative pronouns direct attention to a specific person, place or thing. There
are only four demonstrative pronouns: this, that these, those.
6. Relative pronouns begin a subordinate clause. There are five relative pronouns:
that, which, who, whom, those.

Singular Plural Singular or plural

Another Both All
Anyone Few Any
Each Many More
Everyone Others Most
Everybody several None
Everything Some
Much
Nobody
Nothing
Other
Someone
Anybody
Anything
Either
Little
Neither
No one
One
Somebody
Something
7. Interrogative pronouns ask a question. They are: what, which, who, whom, whose.
Who would like to cook dinner?
Which side does the fork go on?

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 9
 8. Indefinite pronouns refer to people, places, object, or things without pointing to a
specific one. The most common indefinite pronouns are listed on the previous
page.

H. Verbs
Verbs name an action or describe a state being. Every sentence must have a verb.
There are three basic types of verbs: action verbs, linking verbs, and helping verbs.
1. Action verbs
Action verbs tell what the subject does the action can be visible ( jump , kiss,
laugh) or mental (think, learn, study).
The cat broke Louse’s china
Louise considered buying a new china cabinet.
An action verb can be transitive or intransitive. Transitive verbs need a direct object.
The boss dropped ball.
The workers pick it up

Intransitive verbs do not a direct object.

Who called?
The temperature fell over night.

Quick Tip
To determine if a verbs is transitive, ask yourself “who?” or “what?” after the verb. If you
can find an answer in the sentence, the verb is transitive.

2. Linking verbs
Linking verbs join the subject and the predicate. They do not action. Instead, they
help the words at the end of the sentence name or describe the subject. As you read
earlier in this chapter, the most common linking verbs include: be, feel, grow, seem,
remain, appear, sound, stay, look, taste, turn, become. Look forms of to be, such as
am, are, is, were, was, am being, can be, have been, and so on.
The manager was happy about the job change.
He is a good worker.

Many linking verbs can also be used as action verbs.

Linking: The kids looked sad.
Action: I looked for the dog in the pouring day.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 10
Quick Tip
To determine whether the verb is being used as a linking verb or an action verb, substitutes
am, are, or is for the verb. If it makes sense, the original verb is linking verb.

3. Helping verb

Helping verbs are added to another verb to make the meaning clearer. Helping
verbs include any form of to be, do, does, did, have, has, had, shall, should will,
would, can, could, may, might, must. Verb phrase are made up of one main verb and
one or more helping verbs.

They will run before dawn

They still have not yet found a smooth track.

English has eight parts of speech.

1. Adjectives
2. Adverbs
3. Conjunction
4. Interjection
5. Nouns
6. Preposition
7. pronoun
8. verbs

The way a word is used in a sentence determines what part of speech it is.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 11
QUESTION

True False Question

1. A noun names a person, place, or thing.

2. Common nouns name any of a class of person, place, or thing
3. Proper nouns name a specific person, place, or thing. Proper nouns are never
capitalized.
4. Plural nouns show ownership.
5. Verbs express action, condition, or state of being.
6. There are six basics types of verbs: action verbs, linking verbs, helping verbs,
transitive verbs, intransitive verbs and plural verbs.
7. Helping verbs are added to another verb to make the meaning clearer. Helping
verb include any form of to be
8. Adjective describe a Noun or pronoun.
9. Never use an adjective after a linking verb.
10. Adverbs describe verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs.
11. All adverbs are formed by adding –ly to an adjective.
12. Prepositions link a verb to another word.
13. A pronoun gets its meaning from the noun its stand for. The noun is called
antecedent.
14. Conjunction connects words or groups of words.
15. Interjections express strong emotion are usually set off with an exclamation mark
(!)

Completion Question
Select the word that best completes each sentence.
1. Proper adjective are formed form(common nouns, proper nouns)
2. The three article are an, a, and (the, then)
3. The is called the ( indefinite article, definite article)
4. (Predicative adjectives, proper adjectives), which describe the subject of the sentence,
are adjectives separated from the noun or pronoun by linking verb.
5. (interjections, conjunctive adverbs) are used to connect other words and t link ideas
and paragraphs

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 12
 6. There are (three, seven) different coordinate conjunction.
7. Correlative conjunctions also link similar word or word groups, but they are always
used (in pairs, one or a time)
8. Collective nouns (name groups, show ownership)
9. (I, which) is a personal pronoun.
10. (Yours, herself) is possessive pronouns.
11. Intensive pronouns, unlike reflexive pronouns( begin a subordinate clause, add
emphasis)
12. (Interrogative pronouns, indefinite pronouns) ask a question. They are what, which,
who, whom, whose.
13. Every sentence must have a noun and a(preposition, verb).
14. Action verbs can be visible and (mental, linking)
15. In the sentence “ Louis dropped his heat” the verb dropped is( transitive, intransitive)
16. In the sentence “ Nita awoke early” the verb awoke is ( transitive, intransitive)
17. To determine if the verb is transitive ask yourself ( “who”?/”what?”, “how many?”)
after the verb.
18. (Helping verbs, linking verb) join the subject and the predicate and do not show
action.
19. Helping verbs, which are added to another verb to make the meaning clearer, can
include any form of ( to be, to see)
20. In the sentence “ I traded my sandwich for three oatmeal cookies,” the word oatmeal
is a/an ( noun, adjective)

Multiple Choice
Identify the part of speech for the underlined word in each sentence.
1. The outside of the boat needs scraping.
(a) Noun
(b) Adjective
(c) Adverb
(d) Preposition
2. You should scrape the boat without outside help.
(a) Noun
(b) Adjective

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 13
 (c) Adverb
(d) Preposition
3. Let’s sit outside and laugh at you as you work in the blazing sun.
(a) Noun
(b) Adjective
(c) Adverb
(d) Preposition
4. The ambulance is parked right outside the yard, next to the beehive.
(a) (a) Noun
(b) (b) Adjective
(c) (c) Adverb
(d) (d) Preposition
5. The politician repented of his past mistakes.
(a) Noun
(b) Adjective
(c) Adverb
(d) Preposition
6. Turn right past the store with the neon sign on the window.
(a) Noun
(b) Adjective
(c) Adverb
(d) Preposition
7. Did you hear the song before?
(a) Conjunctive
(b) Adjective
(c) Adverb
(d) Preposition
8. Always follow through with what you start
(a) Interjection
(b) Conjunctive
(c) Adverb
(d) Preposition
9. The remark went right through one ear and out the other.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 14
 (a) Noun
(b)Adjective
(c) Conjunctive
(d) Preposition
10. The gardener moved the lawn after he reread Lady Chatterley’s lover.
(a) Conjunctive
(b) Adjective
(c) Adverb
(d) Preposition

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 15
II. SENTENCES STRUCTURE

A. Parts of Speech
Every sentence in English is made up of basic building blocks, the parts of speech.
You should be familiar with these: adjective, adverb, article, conjunction, noun,
preposition, pronoun and verb.

1.1 Parts of speech

NOUN VERB ARTICLE ADVERB ADJECTIVE

Miriam is a very nice young

NOUN PRONOUN VERB PREPOSITION NOUN

Woman. She comes from Venezuela,

CONJUNCTION PRONOUN VERB PREPOSITION

And she is studying at

ADJECTIVE NOUN

our School

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 16
1. Practice identify the part of speech of each italicized word.
Example : My name id Daniel
1. I am from Switzerland.
2. I am studying English.
3. My class has students from many different countries.
4. Hau is an interesting new student who sits next to me now.
5. He is from Vietnam.
6. Ayeh is from the middle East, and Budi is from Africa.
7. Gabriela came to this school because she wants to improve her writing.
8. Everyone is trying very hard to improve in English.

B. Types of Sentences
A sentence is a group of words that expresses a complete idea.
 There are four kinds of sentences:
o Questions
o Statements
o Exclamations
o Commands
 Each kind of sentence includes at least one subject and one verb. In
commands, the subject is understood but no said or written.

1.2 Sentences

Structure Explanations Examples

Questions A questions asks for information orWhat is your name?

for a yes or no. Are you a student?
Statements A statement gives information or My name is Miriam.
opinions. That’s a beautiful
name.
Exclamations An exclamation expresses surprise, What a lovely name
pleasure or other emotions. you have!
We won the world
cup!
Commands A command tells what to do. The (you) Tell me about
subject “you” is understood. yourself.
Have a seat, please.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 17
2. Practice tell whether these sentences are questions, statements, exclamations, or
commands. Identify the part of speech of each italicized word.
Noun verb

Examples : My name is Daniel. (statement)

Pronoun

What’s yours? (question)

1. My name is Ruben.
2. Tell me your last name.
3. If you really want to know, it’s Taboada.
4. What an unusual name you have!
5. Are you from Mexico?
6. I’ve always wanted to go there, but I’ve never had the opportunity.
7. Mexico is large, beautiful country with a variety of climates and landscapes.
8. The capital is Mexico City, and its other important cities are Veracruz and
Guadalajara.
9. Were the Aztec Indians an ancient or a relatively new civilization?
10. How unique their civilization was!
C. Subject
Every sentence has a subject. In commands, the subject “you” or “we” is understood.
In a sentence, the subject is normally the most important word.
 Person
 Place
 Thing
 Event
 Idea

The subject can take several forms:

 Nouns
 Pronouns
 Phrases
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 18
  Clauses

1.3 Subject

Structures Explanations Examples

Noun or A noun names a person, place, thing Miriam comes from

pronoun or idea. Pronouns replace nouns. Venezuela.
She is from Caracas.
Phrases A phrase is a group of related words. Many Venezuelan
students are studying
Infinitive (to + simple form) or in the United States.
gerund (-ing form) phrases can be
used as subjects. To study in the United
States can be
expansive.

Studying in the United

States can be
expensive.
Clause A clause is a group of related words How long they stay in
that includes a subject and a verb. the United States
Dependent clauses are covered in depends on many
Chapter 8 to 10. things.

3. Practice finds the subjects in the following sentences. Underline each subject.

Example: Every year, thousands of foreign students begin university studies in North
America

1. Most international students have studied some English before coming to an

English before coming to an English-speaking country.
2. Many already read and write English fairly well.
3. A major difficulty for all new students, however, is to understands and speak
English.
4. Making phone calls or understanding directions can be difficult.
5. Many Americans use a lot of slang.
6. What can be very difficult is to understand slang.
7. Different age group use different kinds of slang.
8. In the United States, each part of the country also has variations in vocabulary and
pronunciation.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 19
 9. Nevertheless, after the first few weeks in the United States, ost new students will
notice tremendous improvement.
10. All of sudden, English becomes a lot clearer and easier!

D. Verbs, Objects, and Complements

Some verbs tell what the subject does. These verbs can be transitive or intransitive.
 Intransitive verbs do not have objects
 Transitive verbs must have objects.

Other verbs are linking verbs.

 Linking verbs connect the subject to the complement.

 A complement is a noun, pronoun, adjective, phrase, verb form, or clause that
describes the subject.
 Common linking verbs include be, appear become, feel, get, (when it means
become), look seem, smell, sound and taste. The chart gives some exampes.

1.4 Verbs, Objects, and Compliment

Structures Explanations Examples
Intransitive verbsAn intransitive verb is complete Miriam travels often.
without an object.
Transitive verbs A transitive verb must have an When she travels she
and objects. object. It is incomplete without one. always buys souvenir.
Direct object. Direct object answer the questions She bought her
who(m)? or what? daughter a sweater.
Indirect object Indirect object answer the questions She bought her
to/ for who(m)? daughter a sweater.
Linking verbs and Linking verbs are followed by Miriam is a lawyer.
complements. complements: information that She seems happy with
describe the subject. Remember that her work.
adverbs cannot be used as It appears to be a very
complement after linking verbs. interesting job.
Example : Correct : He seems happy.
Incorrect: He seem happily

4. Practice find the verbs in the following sentences. Underline each verb. If the sentence
has an object or complement, circle it.

Example : Learning a new language is difficult

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 20
 1. It is difficult to learn a new language, but the experience can be enjoyable.
2. When you speak another language you can communicate with people from many
places.
3. Thousands of languages exist in the world.
4. Speaking another language will open many doors for you.
5. Since Daniel come to the United States, he has experienced many new people,
places, and ideas.
6. During his studies, he has met people from cultures from every part of the earth..
7. While Daniel has been learning about other cultures, he’s been learning more
about his own.
8. The experience of looking at other cultures can show you a great deal about your
own culture.
9. Think about some of the similarities and differences across cultures.
10. People who can experience life in another country are very fortunate.

E. Sentence types
Sentences can be simple, compound, complex, or a combination of compound and
complex.

1.5 Sentences Types

Structures Explanations Examples
Simple A simple sentence has at least Sukariati arrived from Indonesia
one subject and one verb last week.

A simple sentence can have a Sukariati’s sister and brother are

compound subject. living here now.

A simple sentence can have a Her cousin wanted to come, too,

compound verb. but couldn’t.
Compound Compound sentences are Sukariati began her classes
sentences joined by comma yesterday, and she likes them a lot.
and a conjunction: and, but,
for, nor, or, so, or yet.
Complex Complex sentences are Muljati who is originally from
sentences joined by words Jakarta has lived in the United
such as who, that, because, States for some time. She chose to
after, while, and so on. These live in California because she likes
are covered in Chapter 8 to the climate.
10.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 21
5. Practice label the subject(s) and verb(v) in each following sentences are simple,
compound, or complex. If the sentence is compound or complex, circle the connecting
word.
v s v
Example : Have you met Kunio Takahashi? Simple sentence.

s v s v
Kunio is one of the most interesting people whom I have met here.
Complex sentence
1. My friend Kunio is from Tokyo, Japan.
2. He has studied English in Canada for a year, and now he hopes to study veterinary
science.
3. Because Kunio wants to study both English and veterinary science, he has applied
to schools in Canada and Australia.
4. Is he working on an undergraduate or graduate degree?
5. Kunio already has his bachelor’s degree.
6. He will get his master’s degree, and the he will begin a doctoral program.
7. What did his study as an undergraduate?
8. I’m not really sure.
9. Why don’t you ask him when you see him again.
10. He’s so busy enjoying Canadian life that I never see him.

6. Practice Get into groups and reread the passage “How American Stay Affected Me” on
page 5. Find the subject (s) and verb (v) in each sentence. Then choose one or two
sentences and label the parts of speech in each.

7. Practice Describing similarities and differences across Culture if you have lived or
are living outside your native region or country, think about some of the difference you
have encountered. Can you think of several things that has surprised you? Perhaps they
surprised you because they are different from what you are used to, or perhaps they
surprised you because they’re very similar to what you are used to. Write a short

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 22
 paragraph describing your experiences. Then share your ideas in small groups or with the
class. If you have never traveled outside your native region or country, imagine what the
experience might be like.
Example : I moved to Argentina from Colombia. I noticed many differences even
though both countries are in south America and both are Spanish-
speaking. First, a major difference was the food and times for eating.
Argentines eat dinner very late……

CHAPTER 2

NOUNS, PRONOUNS, AND DETERMINERS TENSES

I. NOUNS

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 23
A. Noncount Versus Count Nouns (1)
Noncount nouns include the following:
 Ideas (history, knowledge)
 Emotions or feelings (love, peace)
 Activities (tennis, swimming)
 Mass noun – things that you can measure (gasoline, rice) or group together
(furniture). The most common mass nouns are names of food.

Noncount Versus Count Nouns

Structure Nouns Explanations Examples
s
Noncount bread coffee Noncount nouns are We need bread.
Nouns butter meat singular and take
cheese rice singular verbs. Do not There isn’t any coffee left.
use a or an with
noncount nouns. Is there some rice?
Instead, you can use
adjectives such as
some and any.
Noncount business a business Some nouns are either We’re having chicken for dinner.
or Count chicken a chicken count or noncount, Have you ever held a chicken?
Nouns glass a glass depending on their
cake a cake meaning. A or an can
be used with these We need glass for the window.
nouns when they are Could I have a glass of water?
count nouns.

1. Practice Write C in front of the count nouns and N in front of the noncount nouns.
Example _______N________ spaghetti
1. ____________________ egg 9. ____________________ milk
2. ____________________ apple 10. ____________________ flour
3. ____________________ rice 11. ____________________ grapefruit
4. ____________________ sugar 12. ____________________ salt
5. ____________________ chocolate 13. ____________________ sandwich
6. ____________________ cheese 14. ____________________ potato
7. ____________________ spoon 15. ____________________ cereal
8. ____________________ fork

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 24
2. Practice The following sentences contain nouns that can be either count or non-count.
Complete the sentences with a or X to indicate that no article is necessary.

Examples: This morning, my mother made a pie.

Generally, I like X pie for desert.

1. I like tea with _______________ lemon.

Did you remember to buy _______________ lemon?
2. I smell _______________ gas.
Neon is _______________ gas.
3. Real estate is _______________ good business
_______________ business is good this year.
4. All animals are afraid of _______________ fire.
There was _______________ fire in our kitchen this morning.
5. I caught _______________ fish yesterday.
Many people prefer _______________ fish to beef.
6. She doesn’t like _______________ chocolate cake.
For her birthday, her mother baked her _______________ chocolate cake.
7. _______________ fruit is healthy.
Is an avocado _______________ fruit?
8. Would you like _______________ glass of juice?
Where can I buy _______________ glass to repair the window?
9. Fondue is _______________ traditional food from Switzerland.
Everyone needs _______________ food to survive.
10. Many people eat _______________ turkey on Thanksgiving.
My uncle has _______________ turkey on his farm.

B. How Much Versus How Many

How much and how many are used to ask questions about quantity

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 25
 How Much Versus How Many
Structures Explanations Examples
How much is used to ask questions with non-
How much bread do we have?
count nouns. Answers to these questions may
Non-count
include a variety of indefinite adjectives such as
Nouns We have a little bread.
a lot (of), lots of, some, much, (a) little, or not…
We don’t have any bread.
any.
How many loaves of bread
How many is used to ask questions with count
should I buy?
nouns. Answers to these questions may include a
Count Nouns
variety of indefinite adjectives such as a lot (of),
Don’t buy very many loaves.
lots of, some, many, (a) few, or not… any.
Buy a few loaves of bread.
Note: The expressions some, (not) any, a lot of, and lots of may be used with both count and non-
count nouns. The expression (a) little, (a) few, (not) much, and (not) many are covered later in this
chapter.

3. Practice Complete the following questions with how much or how many.
Examples: How much flour do we need?
How many bottles of shampoo should we get?
1. _______________ bread should I buy?
2. _______________ apples do we have left?
3. _______________ milk do wee need?
4. _______________ toothpaste should I buy?
5. _______________ boxes of detergent should we get?
6. _______________ rice do you need for that recipe?
7. _______________ water do you drink everyday?
8. _______________ cups of coffee do you usually drink?
9. _______________ head of lettuce should I get?
10. _______________ bars of soap do we have?

C. Common Units of Measurement

To give specific amounts of either count or non-count nouns, use the following units of
measurement. Note that ‘of’ follows all the expressions except ‘dozen’.

Common Units of Measurements

Units of Measurement Items
bag sugar, potato chips, potatoes
bar candy, hand soap

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 26
 bottle detergent, ketchup, juice, soda, other liquids
box cereal, detergent
bunch bananas, carrots, grapes, green onions, flowers

can soup, beans, tuna, soda

carton eggs, milk
cup, tablespoon, teaspoon all liquids and dry recipe ingredients
dozen* eggs, bakery products, fruits and vegetables
gallon, quart, pint all liquids, ice cream
head lettuce, cabbage
jar mayonnaise, peanut butter, jam, mustard, other foods that are spread

loaf bread
package potato chips, spaghetti
piece cake, bread, pie, meat
pound, ounce meat, poultry, fruit, vegetables, cheese
roll paper towels, toilet paper
six-pack, twelve-pack, case beer, soda
stick butter
tube toothpaste

4. Practice Use the picture to complete the list of things that May and Ellen bought at the
grocery store.
Example: one bunch of grapes
1. _______________ of ketchup 7. _______________ of potatoes
2. _______________ of eggs 8. _______________ of detergent
3. _______________ of milk 9. _______________ of toothpaste
4. _______________ of lettuce 10. _______________ of paper towels
5. _______________ of green onions 11. _______________ of hand soap
6. _______________ of mayonnaise 12. _______________ of soda

5. Practice Look at the following advertisements for “specials” at a local supermarket. In

pairs, take turns asking and answering questions with how many, using the cues.

DAIRY SPECIALS!
MUNCHIES!
Grammar 1 Crackers 139/1-lb box
Milk 309/gallon
English Department 29
Potato chips 249/8 oz.
Ice cream 2 /quart Page 27
Swiss cheese 349/lb
 TODAY’S SPECIALS
89 39
Superwhite toothpaste 1 Mayonnaise 2
50 29
Daisies 3 /bunch Ketchup 1
19 89
Soda 2 /six-pack lettuce 1 /head
00
Hand soap 3bars/1 bananas 49ḉ/lb
Special! Eggs 89ḉ/carton

Example: pounds of bananas/ less than $1

A: How many pounds of bananas can you buy for less than $1?
B: You can buy two pounds

1. gallons of milk/ less than $5 7. pints of ice cream/ less than $3

2. boxes of crackers/ less than $5 8. jars of mayonnaise/ less than $3
3. heads of lettuce/ less than $2 9. bags of potato chips/ less than $5
4. pounds of cheese/ less than $10 10. six-packs of soda/ less than$5
5. tube of toothpaste/ less than $6 11. bars of hand soap/ less than 1.50
6. bottles of ketchup/ less than $2 12. dozen eggs/ less than $3

6. Practice In pairs, practice making questions with how much. Take turns asking and
answering questions about the ingredients in the recipe.

Chocolate Fudge 

Cocoa : 6 tablespoons
Sugar : 2 cups
Grammar 1 Butter : 3 ½ tablespoons
English Department Salt : 1/8 teaspoon
Page 28
Milk : ¾ cup
Vanilla: 1 teaspoon
 Example: salt

A: How much salt do you need to make chocolate fudge?

B: You need an eighth of a teaspoon of salt

1. sugar 3. milk 5. vanilla

2. cocoa 4. Butter

7. Practice In pairs, take turns asking and answering questions. Following the examples,
make short conversations about the items.

Examples: CD (count noun)

A: I bought some new CDs today.
B: How many CDs did you buy?
A: I bought three.

Cheese (non-count noun)

A: I bought some Swiss cheese today.
B: How much did you buy?
A: I bought two pounds.

1. Costa Rican coffee 6. strawberry ice cream for

dessert
2. gas for the car 7. carrots
3. tickets for the jazz concert 8. wine glasses
4. detergent 9. chicken
5. fresh fruit 10. bananas

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 29
8. Practice Use the charts below to convert the following items from British units of
measurement to metric units of measurement, and vice versa
Example: three teaspoons of sugar
Three teaspoons of sugar is approximately equal to 15 millimeters of sugar.
1. one quart of milk 6. one liter of soda
2. five pounds of cheese 7. one kilogram of hamburger meat
3. 72o Fahrenheit 8. two kilometers
4. five yards of rope 9. three meters of string
5. 30 miles 10. 25 centimeters of string

Basic Units

Length meter = about 1.1 yards

centimeter = .01 meter = about .4 inch
kilometer = 1,000 meters = about .6 mile

Volume liter = about 1.06 quarts

milliliter = 0.001 liter

5 millimeters = 1 teaspoon

Weight
30 grams = 1.1 ounces
kilogram = 1,000 grams = 2.2 pounds

Temperature
Celsius: 0o C = 32o Fahrenheit
37 o C = 98.6 o F

9. Error Analysis Each of the following sentences has an error. Find the errors and
correct them

s
Example: How many time^ did we go shopping last month?

1. We ate chickens for dinner on Friday night.

2. How many loaf of bread should we buy?
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 30
 3. Please get two bunch of lettuces at the store.
4. I’m looking for the jar of apple juice.
5. How many milks do you want to get?
6. There’s two islands off of the coast.
7. There is head of cabbage in the refrigerator.
8. Three peoples walked into my office yesterday.
9. I bought a dozen of eggs today.
10. Let’s get a bunch of grape.

City living has both good points and bad points. Share your ideas about cities.

City Life
Living in a big city has both advantages and disadvantages, but many people think of
disadvantages first. For example, it is often difficult to find good housing in a large city.
Apartments are expensive, and there are very few houses available in safe locations.
Employment is another problem. Jobs are hard to find in many cities. Transportation is also
difficult. Bicycles can be dangerous, buses are not always on time, and parking is expensive.
City living also has advantages, however. Shopping is much better in a city. There are
special stores for everything imaginable. There are restaurants, delicatessens, and grocery
stores with food from every part of the world. And, of course, entertainment is one of the
biggest advantages of city life. There are art galleries, museums, clubs, plays, concerts, and
shows for everyone’s taste.

Discussing ideas Discuss the questions.

What are the four advantages of life in a big city? What are three or four disadvantages?
Why is housing often a problem in large urban areas?

D. Non-count Versus Count Nouns (2)

Abstract nouns are another common type of non-count nouns

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 31
  Abstract nouns may be ideas, activities, or emotions.
 They often refer to categories or groups that include count nouns.

Non-count Versus Count Nouns

Non-count Nouns Count Nouns
Employment Jobs
occupations
professions
Homework Assignments
Practices
Information Facts
Statistics
Love Dates
Feelings
News Broadcasts
Programs
Violence Arguments
fights
wars
Weather Climates
Storms
Tornadoes

10. Rapid Oral Practice Ellen lives in a large eastern city. Her family lives in the West. She
teaches at a public elementary school. Using the following cues, form sentences about
Ellen’s opinion by adding is important or are important. Speak your sentences to a
partner.

Examples: Friends are important.

Good transportation is important.
1. Free time ……….
2. Honesty ……….
3. Warm clothes ……….
4. Patience ……….
5. Money ……….
6. Neighbors ……….
7. Friends ……….
8. Letters ……….
9. Accurate information ……….

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 32
 10. News from home ……….

11. Practice Fill in each blank with one word from the following list. Some blanks have
more than one correct answer.

area homes jobs parking

cities housing life transportation

Life in a big city has both advantages and disadvantages. There are usually

many apartments for rent. However, ___________ can be very expensive. For example, very
few 1
people can afford to buy ____________. Additionally, it is difficult to find housing in a safe
2
____________. Employment is another problem. ____________ are hard to find in many
3 4
____________. ____________ is also difficult. Bicycles can be dangerous, buses are not
5 6
always on time, and ____________ is expensive.
7

E. Non-count Nouns with There + Be

There + be is also used with non-count nouns.
 With non-count nouns, the verb be is always singular: there is, there was, there has
been
 Indefinite articles (a, an) are not used.

Non-Count Nouns with There + Be

Structures Singular Plural
There is always good entertainment in
Non-count Nouns
New York
Count Nouns There is a good play on tonight There are good plays on every night

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 33
 12. Practice In pairs, take turns making comments and contradicting them. Form complete
sentences from the cues. Each set of cues includes one count and one non-
count noun. Be sure to use the correct form of the verb with each.
Example : cars/heavy traffic.

A: In big cities, there are always a lot of cars.

B: That’s not true. There isn’t always heavy traffic in a big city.

1. Buses / convenient transportation

2. Cheap apartments for rent / inexpensive housing
3. Shows and concerts / good entertainment
4. Poor people / poverty
5. International restaurants / international food
6. Unusual buildings / interesting architecture
7. Dirty streets and dirty air / serious pollution
8. Robberies and assaults / violent crime

F. (A) Little Versus (A) few; Not Much Versus Not Many
Phrases that express quantities or amounts can be used with nouns. Some are used
with count nouns, and others are used with non-count nouns.
 A few, few, and not many are used with count nouns.
 A little, little, and not much are used with non-count nouns.
 A few and a little mean “some” (but not a large amount).
 Not many, few, not much, and little mean “a small amount” (perhaps not
enough).
 Not many and not much are more common in conversational English than few
and little.

A Little Versus A Few and Not Much Versus Not Many

With Count Nouns With Non-count Nouns
A few There are a few apples left. A little There is a little milk left in the carton
(There are some apples left.) (There is some milk left.)
Few Few apples are left. Little There is little milk left
(There is a very small number of apples, (There is a very small amount of milk
probably not as many as we want or need) left, probably not enough.)

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 34
Not There aren’t many apples left Not There isn’t much milk left in the carton
Many much

13. Rapid Oral Practice Go through the list and add a little or a few before each word. Say
the answer out loud with a partner
Example: friends
a few friends
1. Problems 6. News 11. pizza
2. Time 7. Furniture 12. candy
3. Money 8. Clothes 13. facts
4. Assignments 9. Advice 14. arguments
5. Homework 10. Dollars 15. information

14. Practice Add a few or few before count nouns and a little or little before non-count
nouns.
Ellen : What will we eat for breakfast tomorrow? Maybe we need to go shopping and buy

a few things at the store.

May : We have very _____________ money, but I think we have enough for groceries for
1
tomorrow’s breakfast.

Ellen : Luckily, we have _____________ apples, _____________ eggs, and ____________

2 3 4
butter. All we need is _____________ bread and _____________ jelly for breakfast.
5 6
May : But what about lunch and dinner? We have _____________ money but we do need
7
to eat!

Ellen : Well, there are _____________ cans of soup and ____________ peanut butter in
8 9

the cupboard. It’s not much, but it will keep us going until I get my check on
Monday

15. Practice In pairs, make short conversations with the cues. Use how much, how many, a
few, a little, and units of measurements. Use the examples as models.
Examples: green onions / two
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 35
 A: There are only a few green onions left. How many should we buy?
B: Let’s get two bunches.
butter / one
A: There is only a little butter left. How much should we buy?
B: Let’s get one pound.
1. Ketchup / one 6. Toothpaste / two
2. Hand soap / five 7. Cheese / several
3. Mustard / one 8. Potato / three
4. Eggs / one 9. Laundry detergent / two
5. Lettuce / two 10. Juice / several

16. Practice With a new partner, make new conversations using the cues in activity before.
This time, use not many and not much instead of a few and a little.

Examples: sugar / three

A: There isn’t much sugar left. How much should we buy?
B: Let’s get three bags

Green onions / two

A: There aren’t many green onions left. How many should we buy?
B: Let’s get two bunches.

17. Practice Circle the correct answer in each of these sentence

Example: How (much / many ) apples do you need for the pie?

1. I always put (a few / a little) salt in my soup.

2. We don’t have (many / much) potatoes in the house.

3. Is there (much / many) juice in the refrigerator?

4. She eats (lots of / many) candy.

5. We eat (few / little) beef, but we eat (many / a lot of) fish.

6. I bought a (dozen / carton) of eggs.

7. When you go to the store, please buy (some / few) butter.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 36
 8. How (much / many) milk should I buy?

9. Gregg didn’t catch (some / any) fish last night.

10. I forgot to buy (tube / roll) of toothpaste.

11. There aren’t (many / a little) Chinese restaurant near here.

12. There isn’t (a few / much) ice cream left.

13. There was (a lot of / many) traffic this morning.

14. How (much / many) homework do you have tonight?

15. How (much / many) homework assignments do you have tonight?

18. Error Analysis Each of the following sentences has an error. Find the errors, and correct
them.
of
Example: We bought a lot ̯ food at the grocery store

1. Are there a lot of news today?

2. There is only a few milk left.
3. I need to buy some new furnitures.
4. Mrs. Hansen gave me three informations about my project.
5. There is much milk in the kitchen.
6. I still need a little more informations for my report.
7. There is any homework tonight.
8. I would like a chocolate cake for dessert.
9. Please put a apple in my lunch.
10. How many deers did you see on the road?

19. Describing Places What’s your favorite city? What does it have to offer? In a brief
presentation, describe your favorite city to your classmates, including both its good points
and a few of its bad points. Use these questions as ideas to start:
 Is there a lot of entertainment?

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 37
  Are there good restaurants?
 Is there public transportation?
 Are there interesting stores and boutiques?
 Does it have many problems, such as pollution, traffic, or crime?

PRONOUNS

A. Pronouns and Possessive Adjectives

Subject pronouns I he she it we you they

Object pronouns me him her it us you them
Possessive adjectives my his her its our your their
Possessive pronouns mine his hers - ours yours theirs

1. Practice Circle the correct answer

Example: I saw Sarah yesterday, but she / her didn’t see I / me.
1. My family and I have three cats. We / Us really love they / them.
2. We’re going to the cinema. Would you / your like to come with us / ours?
3. The Westons are our / ours neighbors. Their / theirs flat is above our / ours.
4. Alice has a jacket like my / mine, but her / hers is grey.
5. I have a message for your mother. Can you give it / its to her / hers?
6. Those aren’t my / mine keys. They’re your / yours.

2. Practice Complete the letter. Use one word in each gap.

Dear Maria,

I saw (1) your advertisement for a pen friend on the internet and decided
to write to (2)_____________ . (3) _____________ name’s Emma and I’m from Oxford in
England. As you know, Oxford is famous for (4) _____________ university. There are a lot
Grammar 1
of students and tourists here. (5) _____________ live with (6) _____________ family. I have a
English Department
younger brother. (7) _____________ name’s PageTim.
38 (8) _____________ plays football and
sometimes I play with (9) _____________. I also have a sister. (10) _____________’s a student
in London, so we only see (11) _____________ at weekends.
I love all kinds of sport, music, and travelling. This summer I’m going to the south of
B. Possessive ‘s, possessive of
 To show that something belongs to someone:
- We add ‘s to all singular nouns and to plural nouns that do not end in –s:
This is Paul’s jacket. She is the girl’s mother. This is the children’s room.
- We add an apostrophe (‘) to plural nouns that end in –s:
My parents’ flat is quite small
 When one person or thing belongs to two people, we add ‘s to the end of the second
name: He’s Tom and Ray’s father. (Not Tom’s and Ray’s father)
 To show that something belongs to things and places, we use noun + of + noun:
We left before the end of the film. (Not the film’s end)
 We often use noun + noun for some common combinations of words:
Where are they car keys? (Not the keys of the car)
 Note: There can be more than one possessive ‘s in a phrase or sentences:
That’s John’s father’s car.

3. Practice Re-write the sentences. Put the apostrophe in the correct place.
Example: My fathers study is over there My father’s study is over there .
1. Sam’s room is next to my parents room ____________________________
2. The twins playroom is down the hall ____________________________
3. My uncles names are David and Mark ____________________________
4. David’s wife’s name is Sheila ____________________________

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 39
 5. Their children’s names are Pat and Clare ____________________________
6. Pat and Clare’s room is on the right ____________________________

4. Practice Complete the sentences. Use the words in brackets.

Example: The cat’s bowl is empty. Can you give her some food? (bowl / cat)

1. I live at the _____________ - on the sixth floor. (top / the building)

2. I went to stay at my _____________ last summer. (house / grandparents)
3. I’ve painted the _____________ blue (walls / bathroom)
4. The _____________ is Canberra. (capital / Australia)
5. _____________ lived in France before she came here. (teacher / Lisa)
6. The _____________ are over there. (changing rooms / women)
7. Can you switch of the _____________ when you leave? (light / kitchen)
8. There’s a bus stop at the _____________. (end / street)

C. Reflexive Pronouns, each other

I  myself you  yourself he  himself she  herself
It  itself we  ourselves you  yourselves they  themselves

 We use reflexive pronouns for actions we do to ourselves, not to someone else.

Compare: I cut the bread. I cut myself.
 We can also use reflexive pronouns for emphasis: I did all the work myself.
(Nobody helped me.)
 A few verbs are followed by a reflexive pronoun to form an idiom: Please help
yourself. The food’s over there. Children! Behave yourselves! I enjoyed myself at the
party.

Can you distinguish “They’re looking at themselves” from “They’re looking at each other?”

5. Practice Complete the sentences. Use reflexive pronouns.

Example: Don’t come with us, Mum. We can look after ourselves .
1. Enjoy _______________ in London, you two! I’ll see you next week.
2. When David cut _______________, the nurse gave him three stitches.
3. That kettle switches _______________ off automatically.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 40
 4. Jo’s a really good artist. She painted those posters _______________.
5. Nobody helped me organize the concert. I did it all _______________ !
6. Some film actors do all the dangerous stunts _______________.

6. Practice Circle the correct answer.

1. We met on the Internet. We write to ourselves / each other every day.
2. Helen and Annie have known themselves / each other for years.
3. The actors put on their make-up and looked at themselves / each other carefully in the
mirror.
4. She’s my best friend. We tell ourselves / each other everything.
5. It’s a self-service restaurant, so please serve yourselves / each other.
6. We work in groups so that we can help ourselves / each other.
7. Look after the children and make sure they behave themselves / each other.

D. One, ones

We can use one instead of repeating a singular countable noun, and ones instead of
repeating a plural noun: Which bag do you like? This one. These shoes are too big. I
prefer the other ones.

Note: We can use one/ones after an adjective: I’ve got three cats, a black one and two
grey ones.

7. Practice Circle the correct answer.

Example: A: Do you like this shirt? B: No, I like that one / ones.

1. A: Can I try on those earrings? B: These silver one / ones?

2. A: This pen doesn’t work. B: I’ve got another one / ones in my bag.
3. A: Excuse me, this fork’s dirty. B: I’m sorry. I’ll get you a clean one / ones
4. A: Have you seen my shoes? B: Are they the one / ones in the bathroom?
5. A: Can I borrow your mobile? B: Sorry, I haven’t got one / ones.
6. A: Which gloves are yours? B: The blue one / ones.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 41
8. Practice Complete the conversations. Use one, ones, the one, or the ones.
Example A: Let’s go to a Chinese restaurant tonight. Which one_____ is the best?
B: The one in Mill Street’s good.

1. A: That painting’s my favorite.

B: Which _______________?
A: _______________ of the girl with the white hat.
2. A: I can’t decide which trousers to get.
B: _______________ white _______________ are nice.
3. A: Have you seen that film?
B: Which _______________?
A: _______________ about the plane crash.
4. A: I think that’s Kevin’s house.
B: Which _______________?
A: _______________ with the garden at the front.
5. A: These little cakes look delicious. Which _______________ shall we buy?
B: My favorites are _______________ with cream.
6. A: Are these your DVDs?
B: Which _______________?
A: _______________ on the floor.

E. Somebody, something etc.

For things something, anything, nothing, everything
For people somebody/someone, anybody/anyone, nobody/no one, everybody/everyone
For places somewhere, anywhere, nowhere, everywhere

 We use something / somebody / somewhere in affirmative sentences:

There’s something for you in that bag. Someone’s waiting to see you.
 We use something / somebody / somewhere in offers and requests :
Shall I bring you something cool to drink? Could somebody help me, please?
 We use anything / anybody / anywhere in negative sentences and questions:
I can’t find my glasses anywhere. Is anyone here a doctor?

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 42
  We use nothing / nobody / nowhere with an affirmative verb: Nobody can see us.
 We can use something, anybody, nowhere etc. with:
- An adjective: Is there anything interesting on TV?
- To + infinitive: We had nowhere to go.
- The word else: Let’s do something else.
 If everything / everyone is the subject, it is followed by a singular verb:
Everything is ready. Everyone likes her.
Note: Somebody = someone, anybody = anyone, nobody = no one, everybody = everyone

9. Practice Complete the sentences. Use the words in the box.

anybody anything anywhere no one nothing

nowhere someone something somewhere

Example: We must go shopping. There’s nothing in the fridge.

1. I saw _______________ on TV about green tea. Apparently, it’s good for you.
2. Munich is _______________ in Germany, but I don’t know where exactly.
3. Has _______________ seen Tracey’s keys? She can’t find them.
4. I’ll be in Paris next Thursday, but I’ve got _______________ to stay. Can I stay with
you?
5. We don’t want _______________ else to eat, thank you. We’re really full.
6. It’s terrible! An old man got on the bus, but _______________ gave him their seat.
7. Did you go _______________ interesting for your holidays this summer?
8. Could _______________ open that window, please? I’m not tall enough.

10. Practice Re-write the sentences. Use any- or no-

Example: They didn’t say anything to me. They said nothing me.

1. We have nowhere to go. We _________________ to go.

2. I didn’t see anyone. I _________________.
3. There isn’t anywhere else like Paris. There _______________ else like Paris.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 43
 4. She knows nothing about cars. She _________________ about cars.
5. He listens to nobody. He _________________.
6. I can’t tell you anything else. I _________________ else.
7. There isn’t anybody in the street. There _________________ in the street.
8. They didn’t eat anything all d ay. They _________________ all day.

11. Practice Complete the answers. Use some-, no- or every- + -body, -thing or –where.
Example A: What are you doing now? B: Nothing . Why?

1. A: Who came to the party? B: _______________. All my friends.

2. A: Where did you go last night? B: _______________. I stayed at home.
3. A: What do you want o do tonight? B: _______________ relaxing. I’m really tired.
4. A: Who are you talking to? B:______________.It’s the answering
machine.
5. A: What do we need to study? B: _______________. It’ll all be in the exam.
6. A: Where are you going on holiday? B: _______________ hot. It’s really cold here.
7. A: Who did you see? B:______________.I was the only person
there.
8. A: What do you want to watch? B:____________exciting.I hate boring
programs
9. A: Where did you go? B: _______________. We saw everything!
10. A: Who did you meet at the party? B: ______________ nice. Her name’s Cheryl.

12. Practice Complete the conversations. Use something, somebody etc.

A: Do you want to go (1) anywhere tonight?
B: Let’s go (2) _______________ nice for dinner.
A: Is there (3) _______________ in particular you want to eat? Indian food? Chinese?
B: How about some Thai food?
A: Wait a minute. It’s Saturday. (4) _______________ will be full.
B: That’s true. Let’s get (5) _______________ to eat at home, then.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 44
 A: A takeaway. Good idea!
A: It’s very quiet in here. Where is (6) _______________?
B: They’re in the meeting.
A: What meeting? (7) _______________ told me about a meeting.
B: Oh, Michael, don’t you read your e-mails?

13. Practice Complete the sentences. Use the words in the box
1. Leslie’s students have only one class a week, so she gives __________ a lot of
homework.
2. The teachers at Leslie’s school prepare their classes ____________.
3. They also help __________ prepare exams for the students.
4. On the last day of the course, the teachers give the students __________ exam results.
5. If the students have worked hard, __________ normally pass the exam.

14. Practice Complete the sentences. Use the words in brackets and ‘s or of where
necessary.
6. Nobody stayed until the ____________________. (end / the film)
7. I can’t find the ____________________. (key / car)
8. This is the ____________________. (bedroom / children)
9. This is my ____________________. (house / parents)

15. Practice Complete the conversations. Use one word in each gap.
A: I can’t find my sunglasses.
B: There are some sunglasses on the table. Are they (11) __________________?
A: Those red (12) ___________________? No, they aren’t. Mine are black.
B: Maybe you left them (13) ___________________ else.
_____________________________________________________________________
A: Have you seen Valerie’s compositions?
B: Yes, I have. It’s excellent. Do you think she wrote it (14) ___________________?
A: Oh, yes. She used a dictionary, but (15) ___________________ helped her.

16. Practice Circle the correct answer.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 45
 Dear Laura,

We’re writing to thank you for inviting (16) us/ourselves to your birthday lunch on Saturday.
(17) Anything/Everything was delicious and we loved the little cakes, especially the chocolate
(18) one/ones. Did you make all the food (19) you/yourself? It was good to see your new
house, too. Now you live in the country we don’t see (20) us/each other very often, but
please come for lunch at our house next time you’re in town.

Love,

Jake and Delia

F. A/ An and Some
1. We use a/an in front of singular count nouns. Remember, a and an mean “one.”
a table, an umbrella
2. We use some in front of non-count nouns. Some means “a quantity of”.
CORRECT : The cake has some milk in it.
INCORRECT : The cake has a milk in it.
3. We also use some with count nouns in the plural.
a book, some books.

Note: It is possible to use milk as a count noun, but the meaning is different.
I want a milk = I want a serving of milk

17. Practice Tony and Stella are preparing for a picnic. Here’s a list of things they need.
Complete with a/an or some.

1. _____some___________ water 9. ____________________ salt

2. ____________________ orange juice 10.____________________
sandwiches
3. ____________________ tablecloth 11. ____________________ napkins
4. ____________________ radio 12. ____________________ forks

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 46
 5. ____________________ cups 13. ____________________ knives
6. ____________________ ice chest 14. ____________________ umbrella
7. ____________________ fruit 15. ____________________ cookies
8. ____________________ tent 16. ____________________ volleyball

18. Practice What does Joe eat every morning?

He has some coffee. He puts some _______ milk in his coffee. He also puts
in 1
______________ sugar. He has _____________ bread. He puts _____________ butter
on 2 3 4
the bread. Sometimes he has ___________ cheese. He likes _____________ fruit in the
5 6
morning. He has ____________ orange every morning. And he has ____________
banana 7 8
with _____________ cookie at 10.30.
9

19. Practice What do you have every morning?

Example: I have some tea

G. A/ An or The
Form : There is a dog outside. The dog is big
We use the with singular count, plural count, and non-count nouns:
- He has a car. The car is black. (singular count noun)
- I have two boys. The boys are at school. (plural count noun)
- I have some information. The information is important. (non-count noun)

Function: 1. We use the when the person we are speaking to knows which person or thing
we are talking about.
Tony : Where’s John?
Annie : He’s in the house.
(Both Tony and Annie know which house they are talking about)

2. We use a/an when the person we are speaking to does not know which
person or thing we are talking about. Often, we use a/an when we mention

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 47
 something for the first time. We use the after that because the other person
knows what we are talking about.
There is a dog and a cat outside. The dog is chasing the cat.

20. Practice Complete the sentences with the, a , or an.

I live in an apartment in the city. ________ apartment is in ________ big
1 2 3
building. ________ building is old, but it is near transportation and stores. I usually take
4
________ or ________ tramcar to work. ________ bus stops in front of ________ building,
5 6 7 8
and ________ tramcar is just ________ hundred yards from ________ building.
9 10 11

H. Articles

1. Definite and indefinite article

 We use a/an with a singular noun when we talk about something for the first time.
We use the with a singular or plural noun when we talk about something for the
second time:
I bought a jacket and a scarf yesterday. The jacket’s blue and the scarf’s grey.
These are my cassettes and CDs. The cassettes are old, but the CDs are new.
 We use a/an with a singular noun when we talk about a thing, but we do not say
which thing we mean:
Susan’s reading a book. (We are talking about one book, but we do not say which
book.)
 We use the if we are talking about a specific thing: Susan’s reading the new book
by William Bradley. (We are talking about one specific book.)
 We use the when it is clear which thing we mean because there is only one:
John’s in the kitchen. (There is only one kitchen in the house.)
We looked up at the moon. (There is only one moon.)

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 48
21. Practice Complete the sentences. Use a, an, or the.
Example: Can I have a cup of coffee, please?
1. ________ sun is really hot at this time of year.
2. Jane isn’t in her room. I think she’s in ________ garden.
3. There’s ________ new film on at the cinema. Would you like to see it?
4. They’ve got two children, ________ boy and ________ girl. ________ boy’s fifteen
and ________ girl’s eleven.
5. I love swimming in ________ sea when I go on holiday.
6. Anna and Eric live in ________ old house in ________ small village.

22. Circle the correct answer.

Last Saturday was (1) a/the beautiful day, so my friends and I
had (2) a/the picnic in (3) a/the garden. We made some sandwiches
and (4) a/the salad, got some plates and forks from (5) a/the kitchen
and lots of drinks from (6) a/the fridge. Then we got (7) a/the big
blanket and some cushion from (8) a/the living room, and put them
on (9) a/the grass. We carried (10) a/the food and drinks outside and
put everything on (11) a/the blanket. Then we sat on (12) a/the
cushion and had our picnic. (13) A/The sun was warm and we had a
lovely time!

2. Definite and zero article (1)

 We use the with the names of ocean, seas, rivers, deserts, groups of islands and
mountain ranges. We also use the with the with the names of countries when these
are plural, and the name of countries which include the words Kingdom, Republic,
and States:
the Pacific Ocean, the Mediterranean, the Nile, the Gobi Desert, the Bahamas,
the Alps, the Netherlands, the United Kingdom
 We do not use the with the names of lakes, mountains, continents, countries,
cities, towns, villages and streets: Lake Superior, Mount Everest, Asia, France,
London, Oxford Street

23. Practice Write the nouns in the box in the correct group.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 49
 Amazon Andes Asia Canada Caribbean Sea Chile
Dominican Republic Europe Istanbul Indian Ocean Park Avenue
Philippines Rhine Sahara Desert Lake Como Mount Fuji

The -
Amazon Asia

24. Practice Complete the sentences. Use the or –

Example: The largest desert in the world, the___ Sahara, is 9,000,000 square
kilometers.

1. ________ Himalayas grow a few centimeters every year.

2. There is only one time zone in ________ China.
3. ________ Fiji Islands are in ________ Pacific Ocean.
4. ________ Mediterranean Sea is part of _______ Atlantic Ocean. It lies between
_______ Europe, ________ Africa and ________ Asia
5. ________ Fifth Avenue in ________ New York is one of the most famous shopping
streets in the world.
6. The longest river in the world, ________ Nile, is about 6,700 kilometers long.
7. ________ Russian is nearly twice as big as ________ United States of America.
8. ________ Netherlands is a very flat country, with no mountains.
9. ________ Lake Baikal in ________ Siberia is the biggest lake in the world.
10. ________ Iceland is a large island in ________ Atlantic Ocean

3. Definite and zero article (2)

 We usually use the before the places we visit in a town:
the cinema, the theatre, the post office, the bank, the supermarket, the chemist’s
 We sometimes use a/an with these words to mean ‘one of many’. Compare:
I went to the cinema on Saturday. There’s a new cinema in the West Street.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 50
  We do not usually use the with home, school, college, work, town, hospital,
prison:
I go to work at eight o’clock.
Note: We use a/an or the with school, college, university, hospital, prison, etc. when
we are talking about the building, not the institution.
Compare: My sister’s at university. It’s a modern university
My aunt’s in hospital. Where’s the hospital?

25. Practice Complete the sentences. Use the or –

Example: My mother goes to ___the___ baker’s every day.

1. I was at _______ home all day on Sunday, watching television.

2. My brother went to _______ college for three years. He studied Economics.
3. Jane isn’t feeling well, so she is gone to _______ doctor’s.
4. Would you like to go to _______ cinema tonight?
5. I left _______ school when I was sixteen and found a job.
6. If you’re going to _______ chemist’s, can you get me some aspirins?

26. Practice Circle the correct answer.

Example: I’ve got toothache. I’ll have to go to dentist’s / the dentist’s

1. We go to supermarket / the supermarket every Saturday?

2. Excuse me. Is there a / the post office near here?
3. She went to university / the university in Germany.
4. I usually go to work / the work at about half past eleven.
5. There’s a / the market near my home where I buy fruit and vegetables.
6. Are you going to disco / the disco on Saturday night?

27. Practice Complete the conversations. Use a, the or - .

A: There’s a new play on at (1) ___the___ theatre. Would you like to go?
B: I don’t know. I don’t want to get (2) _______ home late.
A: Ok. Let’s go to (3) _______ cinema instead. That starts a bit earlier.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 51
 _______________________________________________________________________
A: What are you planning to do after you leave (4) _______ school?
B: Well, my parents want me to go to (5) _______ university, but I don’t want to.
A: How about working in (6) _______ bank instead?
_______________________________________________________________________
A: I’m going to (7) _______ town this afternoon. Do you need anything?
B: Yes, please. Can you get me some stamps from (8) _______ post office?
A: Sure. I’ll go there before I go to (9) _______ hairdresser’s.
_______________________________________________________________________
A: I feel terrible. I’m not going to (10) _______ work today.
B: Shall I make an appointment for you to go to (11) _______ doctor’s?
A: No, it’s just a cold. But you can get me some medicine? There’s (12) _______
chemist’s near your office, opposite (13) _______ hospital.

4. Definite, indefinite, and zero article

 We use the with:
- The names of cinemas, theatres, museums and hotels: the National Theatre.
- Surnames when we are talking about more than one member of a family:
the Simpsons (the Simpson family)
- Musical instruments: I’m learning to play the guitar.
- The phrase listen to the radio: I like listening to the radio.
 We use a/an:
- To talk about a person’s job: I’m a journalist.
- To describe something or someone with to be: That’s a good book.
- To mean ‘each’ or ‘per’: I drink four cups of coffee a day. He never drives at more
than 80 kilometers an hour.
 We do not use a/an or the with:
- The names of people: Where’s Susan?
- Street names: They live in King Street.
- School subjects: I study Mathematics and Economics.
- Sports and games: I play tennis. Can you play chess?
- Meals: I usually have toast for breakfast.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 52
 - Languages: Paul speaks French and Spanish.
- The phrase watch television: She watches television after work.
 We do not use the with plural nouns and uncountable nouns when we are talking
about something in general: I don’t like vegetables. (Not the vegetables)

28.Practice Complete the sentences. Use a, an, the, or -.

Example: My brother started playing the__ piano when he was four.

1. They stayed at _______ Palace Hotel in San Francisco.

2. Do you know _______ Sarah? She is a friend of mine.
3. I’d like to be _______ actor, but it’s a difficult profession.
4. My favorite cinema is _______ Odeon in _______ Morrison Street.
5. Anne visits her grandparents once _______ week.
6. _______ Wilson live in Brighton now.
7. The children are playing _______ football in the park.
8. I really want to learn _______ Italian and _______ Portuguese.
9. _______ diamonds cost a lot of money.
10. We usually have _______ dinner at seven.
11. These tomatoes cost two Euros _______ kilo.
12. My worst subject at school was _______ History.
13. Please be quite! I’m trying to listen to _______ radio.
14. Oliver Twist is _______ popular book by Charles Dickens.
15. I must go to _______ library tonight and return my library books.
16. Do you watch _______ television every evening?

29. Practice Complete the e-mail. Use a, the, or –

Dear Peter,

My name is (1) - Darren and I live in Manchester. I’m (2) _______ student.
I’m studying (3) _______ Math and Business Studies, but I don’t like college much.
The only thing I like is (4) _______ football. I train four or five times (5) _______
week and play for my local team. I’d like to be (6) _______ professional footballer
and play for Manchester United. Then I could earn millions of pounds (7) _______
year and
Grammar 1 travel all over the world. I don’t speak any foreign languages, but
English
that’sDepartment
not a problem – everyone speaks (8) _______ English nowadays. I like music
Page 53
too. I want to learn to play (9) _______ drums, but my parents won’t let me. Oh
well! What about you? What do you do? Write and tell me.
Best wishes, Darren
30. Practice Complete the sentences. Use a or the.
1. My sister works in _______ shop in west London.
2. I have to go to _______ bank this morning. What time does it open?
3. We’ve got _______ cat and _______ dog. _______ cat always sleeps on my bed.
4. How often do you go to _______ cinema?
5. My mother always buys meat at _______ butcher’s.

31. Practice Complete the sentences. Use the or -.

6. Cycling is a very popular sport in _______ Netherlands.
7. _______ Pyrenees are a range of mountains between France and Spain.
8. Students in the UK study _______ Math until they’re sixteen.
9. _______ Volga River flows across Russia to the Caspian Sea.
10. The Atlantic Ocean is _______ world’s second largest ocean.

32. Practice Complete the e-mail. Use a, the or –

Hi Fredi,
Well, here we are in (11) _______ London. We’re staying in (12) _______ really
nice hotel in Notting Hill. It’s quite cheap – only £60 (13) _______ night. I’m
sitting in (14) _______ hotel at the moment, waiting for (15) _______ Paul. He’s
gone to (16) _______ supermarket next door to buy some bread and cheese for
(17) _______ lunch – it’s incredibly expensive to eat out all the time!
Tonight w want to go to (18) _______ theatre. We’re going to see (19) _______
play called the Mousetrap at (20) _______ theatre near Leicester Square. Hope
it’s good. I’ll write soon
Pam

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 54
I. Expression of Quantity

EXPRESSIONS OF QUANTITY
USED WITH
EXPRESSIONS USED WITH
NON-COUNT
OF QUANTITY COUNT NOUNS
NOUNS
one one apple ø*
An expression of
each each apple ø
quantity may precede a
every every apple ø
noun. Some
two, three, etc two apples
ø expressions of quantity
both both apples
ø are used only with
a couple of a couple of apples
ø count nouns.
a few a few apples
ø
several several apples
ø
many many apples
ø
a number of a number of apples
a little Ø a little rice
Some are used only
much ø much rice
with non-count nouns.
a great deal of ø a great deal of rice
no rice
no no apples
some / any rice
some / any some / any apples
a lot of / lots of Some are used with
a lot of / lots of a lot of / lots of apples
rice both count and non-
plenty of plenty of apples
plenty of rice count nouns.
most most apples
most rice
all all apples
all rice

33. Practice Draw a line through the expressions that CANNOT be used to complete the
sentence correctly.

1. Jake has _______ homework 2. Isabel has _______ assignments

a. three a. three
b. several b. several
c. some c. some
d. a lot of d. a lot of
e. too much e. too much

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 55
 f. too many f. too many
g. a few g. a few
h. a little h. a little
i. a number of i. a number of
j. a great deal of j. a great deal of
k. hardly any k. hardly any
l. no l. no

34. Practice Write much or many. Also write the plural form of the italicized nouns as
necessary. In some sentences, you will need to choose the correct verb in parentheses.

1. I haven’t visited many city in the United States.

2. There (isn’t/aren’t) isn’t much money in my bank account.
3. I haven’t gotten ____________ mail lately.
4. I don’t get ___________ letter.
5. There (isn’t/aren’t) ___________ ___________ hotel in my hometown.
6. There (is/are) ___________ too ___________ furniture in Anna’s living room.
7. There (isn’t/aren’t) ___________ ___________ traffic today.
8. There (isn’t/aren’t) ___________ ___________ car on the road today.
9. I can’t go with you because I have too ___________ work to do.
10. A: How ___________ side does a pentagon have?
B: Five
11. I couldn’t find ___________ information in that book.
12. How ___________ homework did the teacher assign?
13. I haven’t met ___________ people since I came here.
14. How ___________ postage does this letter need?
15. I think there (is/are) ___________ too ___________ violence on television.
16. I don’t have ___________ patience with incompetence.
17. The doctor has so ___________ patient that she has to work at least twelve hours a day.
18. A: How ___________ tooth does the average person have?
B: Thirty-two
19. There (isn’t/aren’t) ___________ ___________ international news in the local paper.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 56
20. How ____________ fish (is/are) ____________ there in the ocean?
21. How ____________ continent (is/are) ____________ there in the world?
22. How ____________ progress has your country made in improving the quality of
medical care available to the average citizen?

35. Practice: If the given noun can be used to complete the sentence, write it in its correct
form (singular or plural). If the given noun cannot be used to complete the
sentence, write Ø.

1. Helen bought several ………. 2. Sam bought a lot of ……….

Lamp ___ lamps_ __ stamp ___ stamps__ _
Furniture _____Ø_____ rice ____ rice ___
Jewelry _____Ø_____ stuff _ __ stuff____
Necklace __necklaces__ thing ___ things_ __

3. Jack bought too much ………. 8. Alice bought a couple of ……….

Shoe _____Ø_____ bread _____ _____
Salt ____salt__ __ loaf of bread _____ _____
Equipment __equipment _ honey _____ _____
Tool _____Ø__ ___ jar of honey ________ ____

4. I read a few ………. 9. Nick has a number of ……….

novel ____________ shirt ____________
literature ____________ homework ____________
poem ____________ pen ____________
poetry ____________ chalk ____________

5. I bought some ………. 10. I don’t have a great deal of ……...

orange juice ____________ patience ____________
light bulb ____________ wealth ____________
hardware ____________ friend ____________
computer ____________ pencil ____________
software ____________
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 57
 6. We need plenty of ………. 11. I need a little ……….
sleep ____________ luck ____________
information ____________ money ____________
fact ____________ advice ____________
help ____________ new hat ____________

7. I saw both ………. 12. The author has many ……….

woman ____________ idea ____________
movie ____________ theory ____________
scene ____________ hypothesis ____________
scenery ____________ knowledge ____________

36. Practice Use many or much* with the following words, changing the words to plural if
necessary. Pronounce final –s/-es loudly and clearly. The cuer’s book is open.
The responder’s book is closed. If you use this Practice in pair-work, switch
roles after item 14.

Example: sentence  many sentences

water  much water
thief  many thieves

1. furniture 8. piece 15. music 22. hypothesis

2. desk 9. mouse 16. progress 23. mail
3. branch 10. advice 17. race 24. office
4. equipment 11. sheep 18. knowledge 25. slang
5. machinery 12. homework 19. marriage 26. roof
6. machine 13. prize 20. information 27. shelf
7. woman 14. goose 21. luck 28. Tooth
* You may want to practice these words in sentences. Much is usually not used in
affirmative sentences; instead, a lot of or a great deal of is frequently used. Much is used
primarily in negative sentences and questions.

USING A FEW AND FEW; A LITTLE AND LITTLE

a few a. She has been here only two weeks, but she has A few and a little* give a
already made a few friends. positive idea; they indicate
(Positive idea: She has made some friends.) that something exists, is
a little b. I’m very pleased. I’ve been able to save a little present.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 58
 money this month.
(positive idea: I have saved some money
instead spending all of it)
few c. I feel sorry for her. She has (very) few friends. Few and little (without a) give
(negative idea: She doesn’t have many friends; a negative idea; they indicate
she has almost no friends.) that something is largely
little d. I have (very) little money. I don’t even have absent.
enough money to buy food for dinner. Very (+few/little) makes the
(negative idea: I don’t have much money; I negative stronger, the
have almost no money) number/amount smaller.
* A few and few are used with plural count nouns.
A little and little are used with non-count nouns.

37. Practice Without substantially changing the meaning of the sentence, replace the
italicized words with a few, (very) few, a little, or (very) little.

a little
1. I think that some lemon juice on fish makes it taste better.

(very) few
2. Many people are multilingual, but not many people speak more than ten languages.

3. Some sunshine is better than none.

4. January is a cold and dreary month in the northern states. There is not much sunshine
during that month.
5. My parents like to watch TV. Every evening they watch two or three programs on
TV before they go to bed
6. I don’t watch TV very much because there are hardly any television programs that I
enjoy.
7. If a door squeaks, several drops of oil in the right places can prevent future trouble.
8. If your door squeaks, put some oil on the hinges.
9. Mr. Adams doesn’t like to wear rings on his finger. He wears almost no jewelry.

38. Practice: Complete the sentences with a few, (very) few, a little, or (very) little.
1. Do you have __a few__ minutes? I’d like to ask you __a few__ question. I need __a
little__ more information.
2. Diana’s previous employer gave her a good recommendation because she makes
_very few_ mistakes in her work.
3. After Steve tasted the soup, he added ____________ salt to it.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 59
 4. I don’t like a lot of salt on my food. I add ____________ salt to my food.
5. I like music. I like to listen to ____________ music after dinner before I begin
studying.
6. Driving downtown to the stadium for the baseball game was easy. We got there
quickly because there was ____________ traffic.
7. Jim is having a lot of trouble adjusting to eighth grade. He seems to be unpopular.
Unfortunately, he has ____________ friends.
8. We’re looking forward to our vacation. We’re planning to spend ____________ days
with my folks and then ____________ days with my husband’s folk. After that,
we’re going to go to a fishing resort in Canada.
9. A: Are you finished?
B: Not yet. I need ____________ more minutes.
10. A: Are you finished?
B: Not yet. I heed ____________ more time.
11. I was hungry, so I ate ____________ nuts.
12. Because the family is very poor, the children have ____________ toys.
13. Into each life, ____________ rain must fall. (a saying)
14. Natasha likes sweet tea. She usually adds ____________ honey to her tea.
Sometimes she adds ____________ milk, too.
15. Has anyone ever called you on the phone and tried to sell you something you didn’t
want? I have ____________ patience with people who interrupt my dinner to try to
sell me a magazine.
16. He’s a lucky little boy. Because his parents have taken good care of him, he has had
____________ problems in his young life.

USING OF IN EXPRESSIONS OF QUANTITY

Correct: A lot of books are paperbacks. Some expressions of quantity (such as a lot
Correct: A lot of my books are paperbacks. of) always contain of. See GROUP ONE below:
Incorrect: A lot books are paperbacks.
Correct: Many of my books are Sometimes of is used with an expression of
paperbacks. quantity and sometimes of is NOT used with
Incorrect: Many my books are paperbacks. the same expression of quantity. See GROUP
TWO below:
Correct: Many books are paperbacks.
Incorrect: Many of books are paperbacks.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 60
 GROUP ONE: EXPRESSION OF QUANTITY THAT ALWAYS CONTAIN OF
a lot of a number of a majority of
lots of a great deal of plenty of
GROUP TWO: EXPRESSION OF QUANTITY THAT SOMETIMES CONTAIN OF AND SOMETIMES
NOT
all (of) many (of) one (of) both (of) some (of)
most (of) much (of) two (of) several (of) any (of)\
almost all (of) a few three (of)
a little (of) etc.
Of is used with the expressions of quantity
in GROUP TWO when the noun is specific. A
noun is specific when it is preceded by:
Many of my books are in English 1. my, John’s (or any possessive)
Many of those books are in English 2. this, that, these, or those
Many of the books on that shelf are in 3. the
English
Of is NOT used with the expressions of
quantity in GROUP TWO if the noun it
Many books are in English modifies is nonspecific. The noun books is
nonspecific; i.e, the speaker is not referring
to “your books” or “these books” or “the
books on that desk.” The speaker is not
referring to specific books, but to books in
general.

39.Practice Add of if necessary. Write Ø if of is not necessary.

1. I know several of Jack’s friends.

2. I’ve made several Ø friends lately.

3. Some ______ students are lazy. Most ______ students are hard-working.
4. Some V the students in Mrs. Gray’s class are a little lazy.
5. Most ______ books have an index.
6. Most ______ Ali’s books are written in Arabic.
7. I bought a few ______ books yesterday.
8. I’ve read a few ______ those books.
9. I’m new here. I don’t know many ______ people yet.
10. I’ve just moved into a new apartment. I don’t know many ______ my neighbors yet.
11. Have you taken any ______ trips lately?
12. Sam hasn’t met any ______ the students in the other class.
13. I usually get a lot ______ mail.
14. A lot ______ the mail I get is junk mail.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 61
 15. Our class has 30 students. Mr. Freeman’s class has 25 students. Ms. North’s class has
20 students. Of the three classes, our class has the most ______ students.*
16. Most ______ the students in our class are very smart.*
17. Out of all the students, Ali usually asks the most ______ questions during class. Most
______ his questions are about grammar.
18. Most ______ people need six to eight hours of sleep every night.
19. Most ______ the people in this class always hand in their assignments on time.
20. China has the most ______ people of any country in the world.

*Compare:
1. The most = superlative. The superlative is used to compare three or more persons
or
things. The most is never immediately followed by of.
Example: out of all the boys, Tom ate the most food.
2. Most (not preceded by the) = an expression of quantity whose meaning range from
“over fifty percent” to “almost all.”
Example: Most of the food at that restaurant is good, but not all of it.

ALL (OF) AND BOTH (OF)

Correct: All of the students in my class are here. When a noun is specific (e.g., the
Correct: All the students in my class are here. students), using of after all is optional.

Correct: All students must have an I.D card. When a noun is non-specific, of does
Incorrect: All of students must have an I.D card. NOT follow all.

I know both (of) those men. Similarly, using of after both is optional
when the noun is specific.
Correct: I know both men. When a noun is non-specific, of does
Incorrect: I know both of men. NOT follow both.

40. Practice Of is not necessary in any of these sentences. In the sentences in which the use
of of is optional, write (of) in the blanks. If of is not possible because the noun is non-
specific, write Ø.

1. All (of) the children listened to the story.

2. Almost all Ø children like fairy tales.

3. Both _____ those books are mine.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 62
 4. I bought two books. Both _____ books were expensive.
5. Almost all _____ students study hard for exams.
6. All _____ birds have wings, but not all _____ birds can fly.
7. I have two brothers. Both _____ my brothers are in school.
8. Do you know all _____ the people in your biology class?
9. All _____ the students in my class are studying English.
10. Not all _____ people are friendly, but most _____ people have kind hearts.

41. Practice: add of and/or write Ø.

1. Some ___Ø__ fish are surface feeders. Others are bottom feeders.
2. Some ___of___ the fish we caught were too small to keep.
3. Almost all _of or Ø_ the fish in Jennifer’s aquarium died. She finally had to admit
that she didn’t know much about taking care of tropical fish.
4. I bought several _________ books at the used book sale.
5. Several _________ my friends and I have volunteered to clean up the litter left on
the school grounds by thoughtless students.
6. The airline was crippled by a strike last month, but now it’s over. All _________ the
pilots were happy to get back to work after the strike.
7. Most _________ people have a little _________ trouble using the currency in a
foreign country for a few _________ days after they first arrive.
8. There’s nothing I like better than a good book, but I haven’t done much reading for
pleasure lately. Most _________ the reading I do is related to my work.
9. It’s important for young people to have goals in their lives. My mother always told
me that any _________ dream is worth pursuing if I know in my heart it is what I
want to do. Few _________ people have made great accomplishments in life without
first having a dream – a personal, inner vision of what is possible.
10. Square dancing is a traditional folk dance in the United States. We all had a lot
_________ fun learning to square dance at the party. Many _________ the people at
the party had never done any square dancing before.
11. When my parents were young, they had little _________ opportunity to travel.
12. A few _________ children are given their first watch by the time they are six years
old. However, most _________ these children cannot tell time correctly.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 63
 SINGULAR EXPRESSIONS OF QUANTITY: ONE, EACH, EVERY
One student was late to class. One, each, and every are followed
Each student has a schedule. immediately by singular count nouns (never
Every student has a schedule. plural nouns, never non-count nouns).
One of the students was late to class. One of, each of, and every one of* are
Each (one) of the students has a schedule. followed by specific plural count nouns (never
Every one of the students has a schedule. singular nouns, never non-count nouns)
*Compare:
Every one (two words) is an expression of quantity; e.g. I have read every one of
those books. Everyone (one word) is an indefinite pronoun; it has the same meaning
as everybody; e.g., Everyone/Everybody has a schedule.

NOTE: Each and every have essentially the same meaning.

Each is used when the speaker is thinking of one person/thing at a time: Each student
has a schedule. = Mary has a schedule. Hiroshi has a schedule. Carlos has a schedule.
(etc.)
Every is used when the speaker means “all”: Every student has a schedule = All of the
students have schedules.

42.Practice Complete the sentences with the correct form, singular or plural, of the noun in

parentheses.

1. There is only one girl on the sixth-grade soccer team. (girl)

2. Only one of the _____________ in the sixth grade is on the soccer team. (girl)
3. Each of the _____________ got a present. (child)
4. Mr. Hoover gave a present to each _____________. (child)
5. We invited every _____________ of the club. (member)
6. Every one of the _____________ came. (member)

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 64
43. Practice Some (but not all) of the following sentences contain errors. Find and correct
the errors.

student
1. It’s important for every students to have a book.
2. Each of the students in my class has a book. (no change)
3. Spain is one of the country I want to visit.
4. The teacher gave each of students a test paper.
5. Every student in the class did well on the test.
6. Every furniture in that room is made of wood.
7. One of the equipment in our office is broken.
8. I gave a present to each of the woman in the room.
9. One of my favorite place in the world is an island in the Caribbean Sea.
10. Each one of your suitcases will be checked when you go through customs.
11. It’s impossible for one human being to know every languages in the world.
12. I found each of the error in this Practice.

44. Practice Conduct an opinion poll among your classmates. Report your findings using
expressions of quantity. Prepare five yes/no questions that ask for opinions or
information about the respondents’ likes, dislikes, habits, or experiences.
Possible questions:
1. Do you read an English language newspaper every day?
2. Do you like living in this city?
3. Do you have a car?
4. Have you ever ridden a horse?
5. Are you going to be in bed before midnight tonight?

Record your classmates’ responses. Then in your report, make generalizations about this
information by using expressions of quantity. For example:

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 65
 1. Only a few of the people in this class read an English newspaper every day.
2. Most of them like living in this city.
3. Three of the people in this class have cars.
4. About half of them have ridden a horse at some time in their life.
5. Almost all of them are going to be in bed before midnight tonight.

45. Practice Most of the statements below are inaccurate overgeneralizations. Make each
statement clearer or more accurate by adding an expression of quantity. Add
other words to the sentence or make any changes you wish. The following list
suggests expressions of quantity you might use. Work in pairs, in groups, or as
a class.

all (of) many (of) one (of) some (of)

each (of) much (of) two (of) several (of)
every a number of half of (a) few (of)
almost all (of) a great deal of 50 percent of (a) little (of)
most (of) a lot of three fourths of hardly any (of)
a majority of none of
hundreds of no
thousands of
millions of

Example : My classmates are from Japan.

Possible sentences:  Most of my classmates are from Japan.
 All (of) my classmates are from Japan.
 One of my classmates is from Japan.
 Hardly any of my classmates are from Japan.
 None of my classmates is from Japan.

1. My classmates speak Arabic.

2. People are friendly.
3. The pages in this book contain illustrations.
4. Babies are born bald.
5. The students in my class are from South America.
6. People like to live alone.
7. The people I know like to live alone.
8. The countries in the world are in the Northern Hemisphere.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 66
 9. The citizens of the United States speak English.
10. Children like to read scary stories.
11. The children in my country go to school.
12. Airplanes depart and arrive precisely on time.
13. The rivers in the world are polluted.
14. The pollution in the world today is caused by human beings.
15. City dwellers do not have cars.
16. The food at (name of the place you usually eat) is very good.

J. Object Pronoun
Many sentences in English have a subject, a verb, and an object.

Noun Subject Verb Noun Object Pronoun Subject Verb Pronoun Object
John Likes rice. He likes it.
Mike and
Love their children. They love them.
Rose

1. The subject can be a noun: a person, a place, or a thing (Mike, a restaurant, a movie.)
2. The subject can also be a pronoun (he, they.)
3. The object can be a noun (rice, their children) or a pronoun (it, them)
4. We often use a pronoun in place of a noun.
Here are the subject and object pronouns:

Subject Pronoun Object Pronoun

I me
you you
he Him
she Her
it It
we Us
they Them

46.Practice Replace the underlined words with a subject or object pronoun.

1. John Blackie is out teacher.
He is our teacher____________________________________________________.
2. He uses this book to teach grammar.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 67
 _________________________________________________________________ .
3. My friend and I study English at the same school.
_____________________________________________________________ .
4. He teaches the students and me English grammar
_____________________________________________________________ .
5. The students like John Blackie.
_____________________________________________________________ .
6. The students ask John Blackie questions.
_____________________________________________________________ .
7. He answers the questions.
_____________________________________________________________ .
8. Linda is a student in our class. Linda always asks questions.
_____________________________________________________________ .
9. We don’t like to listen to Linda, but Mr. Blackie is very patient.
_____________________________________________________________ .
10. Mr. Blackie always answers her questions.
_____________________________________________________________ .

47. Practice Complete the sentences with subject or object pronouns.

A. At the moment, I am studying English. It is a difficult language. Most of my
1
friends are in the school with _________. Our teachers are good, but _________ give
2 3
us a lot of homework. _________ are having a test next week. I want to pass ______.
4 5
Then my parents will not worry about _________ so much.
6
B. John : Do you know that woman?
Pete : Yes, I work with _________.
1
John : Is she nice?
Pete : Yes, ___ ___ is very nice. We work in the same office. Come with ____ __

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 68
 2 3

to the office and I will introduce you to____________. Her husband is my

4
Boss. ________ is a great boss. Do you want me to introduce you to ______
5 6
too?
John : No, That’s OK.

C. Nick : My father bought me a new computer, but I don’t know how to use ______
1
Can you help _________?
2
Dave : Sure, I’ll show ______ how it works. When do you want _____ to teach you?
3 4
Nick : Can you come tomorrow?

Dave : Ok. I’ll see _________ at ten tomorrow. You need to learn some basic steps.
5
You can learn ___________ in a few hours.
6

48. Practice Your Turn

A. Think of the names of your favorite people and things. You can use ideas from the
list or your own
athlete movie star singer
movie restaurant TV program
Find out from your partner why he or she likes or doesn’t like them.
Example: You : Do you like (name)?
Partner : I like (name) because she is very ………….
Or
I don’t like (name) because she is too ………

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 69
 B. Write a paragraph about the person or thing that you talked about in Part A.
Example:
My favorite opera singer is__________________________ __________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
___________ __________________________________________________ ____
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________

Indirect Objects

1. Some sentences have two objects after a verb: a direct object and an indirect object.
A direct object answers the question what or whom* (or who). An indirect object
answers the question to whom or to what.

Subject Verb Direct Object To + Indirect

Object
I sent a gift to my mother

2. We can put the indirect object before the direct object. Then we do not use a
preposition (to).

Subject Verb Indirect Object Direct Object

I sent my mother a gift

3. When the direct object is a pronoun, we put the pronoun before the indirect object.

Subject Verb Pronoun Direct Indirect Object

Object
I sent It to my mother
4. These verbs follow the patterns above:
e-mail hand mail send
give lend pass show

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 70
*In speech and informal writing, we usually use who for objects. In formal writing, we use
whom

49. Practice Underline the direct object and circle the indirect object.
1. The teacher handed the paper to me
2. He sends newspapers to my parents.
3. She showed the photos to us.
4. My grandfather told stories to us.
5. I write letters to my brother.
6. John passed the book to Maria.
7. We lent ten dollars to Kim.
8. My father gave a watch to me.

50. Practice Rewrite the sentences in the previous practice to change the position of the
indirect object. Do not use to
1. The teacher handed me the paper_________________________________________.
2. __________________________________________________________________ _.
3. __________________________________________________________________ _.
4. __________________________________________________________________ _.
5. __________________________________________________________________ _.
6. __________________________________________________________________ _.
7. __________________________________________________________________ _.
8. __________________________________________________________________ _.

51. Practice Underline the direct objects. Then change the direct objects to pronouns.
Rewrite sentences.
1. Jim : I gave my mother the house.
Tom : Who did you give it to?
Jim : I gave it to my mother____________________________________________.

2. Jim : I sold Mr. Black my car.

Tom : Who did you sell it to?

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 71
 Jim : ______________________________________________________________.

3. Jim : I offered my neighbor the television.

Tom : Who did you offer it to?
Jim : ______________________________________________________________.

4. Jim : I sent my friends e-mails.

Tom : Who did you send them to?
Jim : ______________________________________________________________.

5. Jim : I told my boss the news.

Tom : Who did you tell it to?
Jim : ______________________________________________________________.

6. Jim : I showed my friends the photos.

Tom : Who did you show them to?
Jim : ______________________________________________________________.

52. Practice Your Turn

A. It’s a classmate’s birthday. Say four things you can do using verbs from the list.
e-mail give send write
Example: Let’s give him a photo of the class.

B. Now write sentences about what you can do for your classmate’s birthday. Add one of
your own.
1. ______________________________________________________________.
2. ______________________________________________________________.
3. ______________________________________________________________.
4. ______________________________________________________________.
5. ______________________________________________________________.

Indirect Objects with For

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 72
 1. We use for with the indirect object with some verbs. With these verbs, the direct
object comes first, then for + the indirect object.

Subject Verb Direct Object Indirect Object

My father fixed my bicycle for me.

2. These verbs take for + indirect object:

Answer cash fix open pronounce
prepare

CORRECT : My teacher answered the questions for me

INCORRECT : My teacher answered me the questions.

53. Practice Complete the sentences with to or for.

1. A teacher answers questions ___for__ the students.
2. A server shows the menu ________ you in a restaurant.
3. A teacher pronounces words ________ the students.
4. A comedian tells jokes ________ you.
5. A teller in a bank cashes checks ________ its customers.
6. A customer hands money ________ a salesperson.
7. A mechanic fixes cars ________ customers.
8. A teacher gives tests ________ the students.
9. A customer sends a check ________ the gas company.
10. A cook prepares food ________ customers.
11. A reader writers a letter ________ the newspaper.

54. Practice Your Turn

A. What do you do for friends and family on special holidays? Make sentences with
verbs from the list.

e-mail give open send tell

fix hand prepare show write

Example: We hand envelopes with money to our children.

We open the door for our guests.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 73
 B. Make a request for each situation with Could you…, please?

Example: You want to open the door, but your hands are full. What do you say to
your husband?
Could you open the door for me, please?

1. You have a check. You want to cash it. What do you say to the cashier?
2. Your computer doesn’t work. Your friend can fix computers. What do you say to
your friends?
3. Your hands are wet. The phone rings. What do you say to your sister?

Indirect Objects with Certain Verbs

1. We can use two patterns with the verb buy, get, and make.

Verb With For Without For

Buy She bought gifts for you. She bought you gift.
Get I got a tie for my father. I got my father a tie.
Make Jim made breakfast for his Jim made his son
son. breakfast.

2. We can use only one pattern with the verbs explain, introduce, and repeat.

Verb With To or For

Explain I explained the problem to the teacher.
Introduce He introduced me to the teacher.
repeat The teacher repeated the rules for us.

CORRECT : She explained the answer to me.

INCORRECT : She explained me the answer.

55. Practice: Jenny is preparing gifts. Complete the sentences with the words in
parentheses.
Write each sentence two ways as in the example.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 74
 1. She bought (a tie/her father)
She bought a tie for her father. She bought him a tie_________________________.
2. She got (a blouse/her mother)
___________________________________________________________________.
3. She made (a sweater/her brother)
___________________________________________________________________.
4. She bought (a toy/her niece)
___________________________________________________________________.
5. She got (books/her sister)
___________________________________________________________________.
6. She made (a cake/her neighbors)
___________________________________________________________________.
7. She bought (a wallet/Brian)
___________________________________________________________________.
8. She got (a plant/her boss)
___________________________________________________________________.
9. She made (cookies/her roommate)
___________________________________________________________________.

56. Practice Complete the sentences with the words in parentheses.

1. The teacher explained (us/the answer)
The teacher explained the answer to us___________________________________.
2. The teacher introduced (us/indirect objects)
__________________________________________________________________.
3. The teacher repeated (us/the questions)
__________________________________________________________________.
4. The teacher explained (me/the meaning of the word)
__________________________________________________________________.
5. The student repeated (her/the sentence)
__________________________________________________________________.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 75
 6. The teacher introduced (us/the new student)
__________________________________________________________________.
7. The students explained (the teacher/her problem)
__________________________________________________________________.
8. The teacher introduced (the class/the speaker)
__________________________________________________________________.
9. The teacher repeated (us/the difficult words)
__________________________________________________________________.

57. Practice Make sentences with the words in parentheses. Use to or for where necessary.
In some cases, two patterns are possible.

1. Tim bought (his wife/a gift)

Tim bought a gift for his wife ___________________________________________.
2. He fixed (her/the car)
____________________________________________________________________.
3. He made (dinner/her)
____________________________________________________________________.
4. He got (flowers/her)
____________________________________________________________________.
5. He opened (the door/her)
____________________________________________________________________.
6. He showed (a letter/her)
____________________________________________________________________.
7. He explained (his problem/her)
____________________________________________________________________.
8. His wife told (her ideas/him)
____________________________________________________________________.
9. She gave (advice/him)
____________________________________________________________________.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 76
58. Practice Your Turn: What are you going to do next month? Use the verbs from the list
to make sentences.
buy get open show
fix make prepare tell
Example: I am going to buy a present for my wife. It’s her birthday.

Possessive Pronouns

Possessive Pronoun Possessive Adjective

Mine My
Yours Your
Hers Her
His His
Its Its
Ours Our
Theirs Their

1. We put possessive adjective before a noun. A possessive pronoun is used alone.

This is my pen. This pen is mine.
That is their television. It’s theirs.

2. We use possessive pronouns and possessive adjectives to show something belongs to

somebody
Excuse me, is this your umbrella? OR Excuse me, is this yours?

3. Do not confuse its and it’s

Its is a possessive adjective  The bus needs its tire fixed.

It’s is a contraction of it is  It’s time to go.

59. Practice Circle the correct form.

1. Karen : Don’t forget ( your / yours ) umbrella!
Jamie : That’s not my umbrella. (My/Mine) is black.
2. Jim : Do the Petersons live here?
Dave : Yes, they do.
Jim : Is that (their/theirs) house?
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 77
 Dave : No, it isn’t. (Theirs/Their) is around the corner.
3. Bobby: That’s (my/mine) teddy bear!
Jenny : No, it isn’t! It’s (mine/my) teddy bear.
Mother: Stop it children! Jenny, give Bobby his teddy bear.
Jenny : it isn’t his. It’s (mine/my).
4. My brother rents his apartment, and I rent (my/mine) apartment.
His apartment is small, but (my/mine) is big.
5. Tony : Where is (their/theirs) car parked?
Pete : (Their/Theirs) is on the street.
Tony : Is Maria’s car on the street too?
Pete : No, (her/hers) is in the driveway.

6. Ben : Shall we take (your/yours) car or (my/mine) car?

Jerry : Let’s take (my/mine). It’s faster than (your/yours).
Ben : Yes, but (my/mine) car is more comfortable.

7. Suzy : Is that (your/yours) bag over there?

Laura : No, it isn’t (my/mine). I thought it was (your/yours).

8. (Our/Ours) classroom is very nice and bright. The teacher has (her/hers) table and
chair, and we have (our/ours).

60. Practice Complete the sentences with it’s and its.

1. ___It’s____ cold outside so take a coat.
2. My sofa was old, so I changed __________ cover.
3. __________ not far. You can walk.
4. The store is near here, but I can’t remember __________ name.
5. __________ a beautiful apartment. How much is the rent?
6. How much is the jacket? I don’t see __________ price.
7. A: Who is it?
B: __________ me.
8. The new town has __________ bank and shopping area in the center.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 78
61. Practice Your Turn: Work with a partner. Compare your hair, eyes, shoes, hands, etc.
Example: My hair is long. Yours is short.

Indefinite Pronouns

Some- Any- No-

Things something anything nothing
People someone anyone no one

1. We use some- (something, someone), and no- (nothing, no one) in affirmative

statements.
Someone is at the door.
2. We use any- (anything, anyone) in negative statements.
I can’t see anyone
3. We use some- or any- in questions.
Can you see something? OR Can you see anything?

62. Practice Complete the sentences with something, someone, anything, anyone, nothing,
and no one.
1. Lin : There’s someone_____ at the door.
Jim : There’s no one______ here. There must be something____ wrong
with your ears!

2. John : Let’s have _______________ to eat. How about a sandwich?

Pete : No, thanks. I’m not hungry. I don’t want to _______________ to eat.

3. I went to the store to buy _______________ for Jamie’s birthday. But there was
_______________! So I didn’t buy _______________.

4. Kim : Is there _______________ in the mail for me?

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 79
 Nancy : Sorry, there’s _______________ for you, but there’s _______________ for
me.

5. Sylvia : I think there’s _______________ in my eye.

Ben : Your eye is red, but I can’t see _______________ in it.

6. ______________ is wrong. Jim is never late. Does _____________ know

_____________?

7. Don : Did you lose _______________?

Kevin : No, I didn’t lose _____________. I just can’t see _____________ without
my glasses.

8. Mike : Do you know _______________ about Japanese history?

Bob : _______________, sorry. Maybe Tony knows _______________. Ask him.

9. Kim : I’m thirsty. Is there _______________ in the fridge?

Lena : No, there’s _______________. How about _______________ hot, like tea?

10. Erik : Do you hear _______________?

Louis : No, I don’t hear _______________.
Erik : Do you see _______________?
Louis : No, I don’t see _______________.

WRITING: Write an Expository Paragraph

Write a paragraph about gifts.
Step 1. Work with a partner. Ask questions like these about a person your partner sends cards
and gifts to. Write the answers to the questions.

1. Who is a person you always send a card or give a gift to?

2. On what occasion (birthday, Valentine’s Day, Christmas, etc.) do you send a card?

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 80
 3. What kind of card do you usually send this person? (funny card, card with flowers,
etc.)
4. What do you say in the card?
5. What kind of gifts do you get for this person? How much money or time do you
spend on a gift? Do you like to buy gifts for this person, or is it difficult to buy a
gift?
6. Does this person also send you a card and buy you gifts?
7. Do you like your cards and gifts? Do you keep them?

Step 2. Rewrite your answers in paragraph form.

Step 3. Write a title in three or four words, for example, “Cards and Gifts”
Step 4. Evaluate your paragraph.

Checklist
__________ Did you indent the first line?
__________ Did you give your paragraph a title?
__________ Did you use capital letters correctly?
__________ Did you use verb tenses correctly?

Step 5. Work with your partner to edit your paragraph. Correct spelling, punctuation,
vocabulary, and grammar.
Step 6. Write your final copy.

II. DETERMINERS TENSES

Preview the passage. Discuss the questions. What is culture? How much does culture
influence us?
Reading. Edward Hall says that the most basic and obvious parts of our culture are often
the parts that influence us the most. As you read the following passage, try to

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 81
 decide what he means by this. What are some of the most basic parts of your
culture? Do they influence you a great deal?

What Is Culture?
Cultures are extraordinarily complex, much more so than TV sets, automobiles, or
possibly even human physiology. So how does one go about learning the underlying
structure of culture? Looking at any of the basic system in a culture is a good place to start
– business, marriage and the family, social organization – any will do
Culture is humanity’s medium; there is not one aspect of human life that’s not
touched and altered by culture. This means personality, how people express themselves
(including shows of emotion), the way they drink, how they move, how problems are
solved, how their cities are planned and laid out, how transportation system are organized
and function. However, it is frequently the most obvious and taken-for-granted and
therefore the least studied aspects culture that influence behavior in the deepest and most
subtle ways.
_________________
Source: Beyond Culture (Edward T. Hall)

Discussing Ideas In the first paragraph, Hall gives three examples of basic cultural systems;
business, marriage and the family, and social organization. Discuss one of
these examples (or one of your own) with another classmate. Compare two
cultures in the area of business, marriage, family, and so on. What do you
think is the biggest difference between these two cultures?

A. Verbs: Principal Parts and Regular Verb Tense Formation

All tenses and verb constructions are formed from the five principal forms of the verbs.

The Principal Parts of Verbs

Infinitive Simple Form Past Form Past Participle Present Participle
to walk Walk walked Walked Walking
to play play played played playing
to run run ran run running
to write write wrote written writing
to be be was/were been being
to do do did done doing
to have have had had having
Note: The modal auxiliaries –can, could, may, might, must, ought to, shall, should, will, and
would- are not included here because each has only one form, the simple form.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 82
 Regular verb tense formation involves one of four forms: the simple form, past form, past
participle, or present participle.

Verb Tense Formation: Regular Verbs

Structures Explanations Examples
Simple The simple form is used COMMANDS SIMPLE PRESENT SIMPLE FUTURE
Form to form commands, the Stand! I walk I will walk
simple present tense, Be seated! She walks She will walk
and the simple future
tense
Past Form The past form is used REGULAR VERBS
for the simple past tense. I walked
Regular verbs are the She walked
simple form + -ed
Past The past participle is PRESENT PAST FUTURE
Participle used to form the present, PERFECT PERFECT PERFECT
past, and future perfect I have walked I had walked I will have walked
tense and all passive She has walked She had walked She will have walked
voice forms
Present The present participle is PRESENT PAST FUTURE
Participle used with the verb be to CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS
form all continuous I am resting I was resting I will be resting
tense She is resting She was resting She will be resting
We are resting We were resting We will be resting

PRESENT PAST FUTURE

PERFECT PERFECT PERFECT
CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS
I have been I had been resting I will have been
resting resting
She has been She had been She will have been
resting resting resting

Pronunciation Notes

The –s ending is pronounced three ways, according to the ending of the verb.

Examples

 /iz/ after –ch, -sh, -s, -x and –z endings teaches, washes, kisses, boxes, buzzes
 /s/ after voiceless endings: p, t, k, or f stops, hits, looks, laughs
 /z/ after voiced consonant endings calls, listens, plays, sounds, runs
Grammar 1
English Department
The –ed ending is pronounced three ways, according to the ending of the verb.
Page 83

 /id/ after –d and –t endings needed, insisted, waited, wanted

 /t/ after voiceless endings boxed, helped, looked, watched, washed
1. Practice Change the following sentences to the singular. Add a or an and change
pronouns when necessary. Use his or her instead of their. If you do this activity orally,
give the spelling of the singular verbs. Notice the different ways the –s ending is
pronounced.

Example: Children begin to learn about culture at an early age.

A child begins to learn about culture at an early age.

1. Children pick up cultural rules quickly.

2. Children rely on their parents.
3. Children watch and imitate their parents
4. Parents convey a great deal nonverbally, as well as with words.
5. Children also pay attention to their close relatives, such as grandparents, aunts, or
uncles.
6. Children learn their society’s rules of time, distance, and order.
7. For example, American parents teach children promptness.
8. If children miss the bus, they go to school late.
9. Eventually, the children try to be on time.
10. At first, children usually do things in the same ways as their loved ones.
11. As children grow older, their peer groups become very important to them
12. Children start to imitate their peers more and more.

2. Practice Fill in the blanks with the past tense of the verbs in parentheses to complete the
sentences. If you do this activity orally, give the spelling of each past tense form. Notice
the different ways the –ed ending is pronounced.
Example: Margaret Mead _____lived______ (live) with the Manus tribe in South Pasific

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 84
 1. Margaret Mead _______________ (study) island people in the South Pacific.
2. She first _______________ (visit) the isolated Manus tribe in 1928.
3. The Manus _______________ (agree) to let her live among them.
4. They _______________ (permit) her to record their day-to-day life.
5. The isolation of the Manus tribe _______________ (stop) with World War II.
6. The United States government _______________ (ship) supplies and soldiers through
these islands during World War II.
7. This contact with another culture _______________ (affect) every aspect of Manus
life.
8. After the arrival of U.S. soldiers, incredible changes _______________ (occur) on the
islands.
9. Margaret Mead _______________ (travel) to the islands again in 1953 and -
_______________ (observe) many changes.
10. She _______________ (notice) that the Manus _______________ (dress) in Western
clothes, _______________ (cook) Western food, and _______________ (carry)
transistor radios.

3. Practice Complete the sentences by filling in the blanks with the present continuous
tense of the verbs in parentheses. If you do this activity orally, give the spelling of each
present participle.
Example: Social scientists _ are trying __ (try) to understand the effect of television on
culture.
1. Today, social scientists _______________ (study) the influence of American
television and movies in foreign countries.
2. Many believe that television and movies _______________ (cause) cultural change.
3. Television stations around the world _______________ (carry) programs movies, and
commercials from the U.S.
4. Changes _______________ (happen) worldwide because of the mass media.
5. Some people believe that TV and movies _______________ (create) a world culture.
6. Through the mass media, people everywhere _______________ (get) regular “lesson”
in American culture and values from other countries.
7. Some countries _______________ (control) the number of American programs on
local stations.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 85
 8. Other countries _______________ (begin) to monitor all foreign influences because
they feel these influences _______________ (threaten) their own culture.
9. Several countries _______________ (monitor) radio, television, and films.
10. However, few countries _______________ (succeed) in controlling the media,
especially the Internet.

B. Verb Tense Formation: Irregular Verbs

Irregular verbs appear often in both spoken and written English. You should know the
forms of these verbs without consciously thinking about them. The following excercises
give you a brief review of some of the more common ones.

4. Practice Complete the story by filling in the blanks with the past tense of the verbs in
parentheses. If you do this activity orally, give the spelling and pronunciation of each
verb.

Adjusting to a New Culture

When I ____left_____ (1. leave) Brazil to live in the States, I ______________ (2.
know) I would probably experience “culture shock,” but I really _______________ (3. have)
no idea what culture shock actually _______________ (4. be)
I _______________ (5. go) through several different stages during my stay, and for a
long time I (6. feel) that these stages _______________ (7. be) unique to me. Finally, I -
____________ (8. begin) to discuss my feelings with other foreign students, and I -
_______________ (9. see) that our “stages” _______________ (10. run) along similar lines.
At first, we all _______________ (11. feel) thrilled about everything “new.” Then, problems
_______________ (12. arise) with transportation, money, housing, and so on. All of us -
_______________ (13. say) at that point we suddenly _______________ (14. become)
exhausted and frustrated with the language, the people, with everything. I almost (15. go)
home! Luckily, I didn’t because things ____________ (16. Get) better in a short time. Soon, I
______________ (17. find) that I ______________ (18. understand) people better. I -
_______________ (19. grow) more and more used to my new way of life, and this helped me
relax. I ____________ (20. meet) a lot of nice people, and I ____________ (21. make) some

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 86
very good friends after that first “crisis.” Later _______________ (22. come) a second crisis,
though, and finally real “adjustment.” Well, I still haven’t gone back to Brazil…

5. Practice Fill in the blanks with the past participles of the verbs in parentheses. If you do
this activity orally, give the spelling and pronunciation of each verb.

Returning to Your Own Culture

People who have ____spent____ (1. spend) time in other cultures often talk
about “reverse culture shock.” If you have _______________ (2. leave) your country for
more than a short tourist rip and then have _______________ (3. go) back home, you may
have _______________ (4. feel) it. What is “reverse culture shock”? Well, imagine the
following: you’ve _____________ (5. become) adjusted to a new culture, and you’ve -
_______________ (6. grow) to enjoy life in it. You’ve _______________ (7. make) new
friends and have _______________ (8. have) a great variety of new experiences. Then it’s
time to leave, and you’re sad, but you’re also very excited about going home. Arriving home
is “wonderful” –seeing all the friends and relatives you hadn’t _____________, (9. see)
eating all the special foods you hadn’t _____________, (10. eat) reading the newspaper you
hadn’t ______________, (11. read) hearing music you hadn’t _____________ (12. hear) in
such a long time. But then, after you’ve _______________ (13. be) home for a few weeks
perhaps, things may not seem so “wonderful.” You may become critical of your home
country; you may not like certain things or ideas. Your city may have changed, and people
may have changed too. Or, perhaps in your eyes, you’ve changed and they haven’t changed at
all.
This is the process of readjustment. It’s a difficult period, and many people
experience it after the initial excitement of coming home has _______________ (14. wear)
off. Fortunately, it doesn’t usually last bas long as adjustment to a new culture does.

C. Phrasal Verb

Phrasal Verbs: Introduction

a. We put off our trip. We’ll go next month In (a): put off = a phrasal verb.
instead of this month. (put off = postpone) A phrasal verb = a verb and a particle that
b. Jimmy, put on your coat before you go together have a special meaning. For
outdoors. (put on = place clothes on one’s example, put off means “postpone.”
body) A particle = a “small word” (e.g., off, on,
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 87
c. Someone left the scissors on the table. away, back) that is used in a phrasal verb.
They didn’t belong there. I put them Note that the phrasal verbs with put in (a),
away. (put away = put something in its (b), (c), and (d) all have different meanings
usual or proper place)
d. After I used the dictionary, I put it back
on the shelf. (put back = return something
to its original place)
SEPARABLE Some phrasal verbs are separable:
a NOUN OBJECT can either
e. We put off our trip.= 1. Follow the particle, as in (e) OR
(vb+particle+NOUN) 2. Come between (separate) the verb
f. We put our trip off.= (vb and the particle, as in (f).
+NOUN+particle) If a phrasal verb is separable, a PRONOUN
g. We put it off. = (vb OBJECT comes between the verb and the
+PRONOUN+particle) particle, as in (g).
INCORRECT: we put off it.
NON-SEPARABLE If a phrasal verb is non-separable, a NOUN or
h. I ran into Bob. = (vb+particle+NOUN) PRONOUN always follows (never precedes)
i. I ran into him. = the particle, as in (h) and (i)
(vb+particle+PRONOUN) INCORRECT: I ran Bob into OR I ran him
into

6. Practice If the phrasal verb is separable, circle SEP. If it is not separable, circle NONSEP.

1. CORRECT : I turned the light on. turn on = SEP /NONSEP

CORRECT : I turned on the light.

2. CORRECT : I ran into Marry. run into = SEP/ NONSEP

(INCORRECT : I ran Mary into.)

3. CORRECT : Joe looked up the definition. look up = SEP /NONSEP

CORRECT : Joe looked the definition up.

4. CORRECT : I got off the bus. get of = SEP/NONSEP

(INCORRECT : I got the bus off.)

5. CORRECT : I took off my coat. take off = SEP/NONSEP

CORRECT : I took my coat off.

6. CORRECT : I got in the car and left. get in = SEP/NONSEP

(INCORRECT : I got the car in and left.)

7. CORRECT : I figured out the answer. figure out = SEP/NONSEP

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 88
 CORRECT : I figured the answer out.

8. CORRECT : I turned the radio off. turn off = SEP/NONSEP

CORRECT : I turned off the radio.

7. Practice Underline the second part of the phrasal verb in each sentence.

1. I figured the answer out.

2. The teacher called on me in class.
3. I made up a story about my childhood.
4. I feel okay now. I got over my cold last week.
5. The students handed their papers in at the end of the test.
6. I woke my roommate up when I got home.
7. I picked up a book and started to read.
8. I turned the radio on to listen to some music.
9. When I don’t know how to spell a word, I look it up in the dictionary.
10. I opened the telephone directory and looked up the number of a plumber.
11. I put my book down and turned off the light.

8. Practice Complete the sentences with pronouns and particles. If the phrasal verb is
separable, circle SEP. If it is non-separable, circle NONSEP

1. I got over my cold.  I got _____over it ______. SEP NONSEP

2. I made up the story  I made ______it up______. SEP NONSEP
3. I put off my homework  I put _________________. SEP NONSEP
4. I wrote down the numbers  I wrote _________________. SEP NONSEP
5. I ran into Robert  I ran _________________. SEP NONSEP
6. I figure the answer out  I figured _________________. SEP NONSEP
7. I took off my shoes  I took _________________. SEP NONSEP
8. I got over my cold  I got _________________. SEP NONSEP
9. I turned off the lights  I turned _________________. SEP NONSEP
10. I threw away the newspaper  I threw _________________. SEP NONSEP

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 89
 Group A: Phrasal Verb (Separable)
Verb Definition Example
Figure out … find the solution to a problem I figured out the answer.

Hand in …… give homework, papers, etc. to a teacher We handed in our homework.

Hand out....... give something to this person, than to that The teacher handed out the test
papers.
person, then to another person, etc.

Look up.…. look for information in a dictionary, in I looked a word up in the dictionary.
a telephone directory or encyclopedia

Make up….. invent (a story) Children like to make up stories.

Pick up…… lift Tom picked up the baby.

Put down….. stop holding or carrying I put down the heavy packages.

Put off…… postpone We put off our trip until next

summer.

Put on…… place clothes in one’s body I put on my clothes before I left.

Take off…… remove clothes from one’s body I took off my coat when I arrived.

Throw away I threw away my old notebooks.

put in the trash, discard
Throw out I threw out my old notebooks.

Turn off…… stop a machine or a light I turned off the lights and went to
bed.

Turn on…… start a machine or a light I turned on the light so I could read.

Wake up….. stop sleeping My wife woke me up at six.

Write down…. Write a note on a piece of paper I wrote his phone numbers down.

9. Practice Complete the sentences with the given particles.

away down in off on out up

1. Before I left home this morning, I put _____on_______ my coat.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 90
 2. When I got to class this morning, I took my coat ______________.

3. The students handed their homework ______________.

4. Johnny made ______________ a story. He didn’t tell the truth.

5. The weather was bad, so we put ______________ the picnic until next week.

6. Alice looked a word ______________ in her dictionary.

7. Alice wrote the definition ______________.

8. My roommate is messy. He never picks ______________ his clothes.

9. The teacher handed the test paper ______________ at the beginning of the class
period.

10. A strange noise woke ______________ the children in the middle of the night.

11. When some friends came to visit, Chris stopped watching TV. He turned the
television set ______________.

12. It was dark when I got home last night, so I turned the lights ______________.

13. Peggy finally figured ______________ the answer to the arithmetic problem.

14. When I was walking through the airport, my arms got tired. So I put my suitcases
______________ for a minute and rested.

15. I threw ______________ yesterday’s newspaper.

10. Practice Complete the sentences with pronouns and particles.

1. A: Did you postpone your trip to Puerto Rico?
B: Yes, we did. We put ____it off until next summer.
2. A: Is Pat’s phone number 322-4454 or 322- 4455?

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 91
 B: I don’t remember. You’d better look __________. The telephone directory is in the

kitchen
3. A: Is Mary asleep?
B: Yes. I’d better wake ____________. She has a class at nine.
4. A: Do you want to keep these newspapers?
B: No. Throw ____________.
5. A: I’m hot. This sweater is too heavy.
B: why don’t you take ______________?
6. A: Is that story true?
B: No. I made ______________.
7. A: When does the teacher want our compositions?
B: We have to hand ______________ tomorrow.
8. A: I made an appointment with Dr. Armstrong for three o’clock next Thursday.
B: You’d better write ______________ so you won’t forget.
9. A: Do you know the answer to this problem?
B: No. I can’t figure ______________.
10. A: Johnny, you’re too heavy for me to carry. I have to put ______________.
B: Okay, Mommy.
11. A: Oh dear. I dropped my pen. Could you pick ______________ for me?
B: Sure.
12. A: How does this tape recorder work?
B: Push this button to turn ______________, and push that button to turn
____________.
13. A: I have some papers for the class. Ali, would you please hand ______________ for
me?
B: I’d be happy to.
14. A: Timmy, here’s your hat. Put ______________ before you go out. It’s cold outside.
B: Okay, Dad.

Group B: Phrasal Verb (Nonseparable)

Verb Definition Example
Call on … ask (someone) to speak in class The teacher called on Ali.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 92
Come from .. originate Where do these banana come from?

Get over…. recover from an illness or a shock Sue got over her cold and return to
work.

Get off....... leave a bus/airplane/train/subway I got off the bus at Maple Street.

Get on.….. enter a bus/airplane/train/subway I got on the bus at Pine Street.

Get in……. enter a car, a taxi I got in the taxi at the airport.

Get out of.. leave a car, a taxi I go out of the taxi at the hotel.

Look into... investigate someone needs to look into this

problem.

Run into… meet by chance I ran into Peter at the market.

11.Practice Complete the sentences with particles.

1. When I raised my hand in class, the teacher called ___on____ me.

2. While I was walking down the street, I ran __________ an old friend.

3. Fred feels okay today. He got ___________ his cold.

4. Last week I flew from Chicago to Miami. I got ___________ the plane in Chicago. I
got ___________ the plane in Miami.

5. Sally took a taxi to the airport. She got ___________ the taxi in front of her apartment
building. She got ___________ the taxi at the airport.

6. I take the bus to school every day. I get ___________ the bus at the corner of First
Street and Sunset Boulevard. I get ___________ the bus just a block away from the
classroom building.

7. Mr. Zabidi will look ___________ renting a car for his weekend trip.

8. Where do snow leopards come ___________?

12.Practice Complete the sentences with particles and pronouns.

1. I had the flu, but I got ___over it____ a couple of days ago.

2. I was wearing gloves. I took ___________ before I shook hands with Mr. Lee.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 93
 3. Stacy needed to find the date India became independent. She looked ___________ on
the computer and wrote ___________ in her notebook.

4. I tried to solve the math problem, but I couldn’t figure ___________.

5. It looked like rain, so I got my raincoat from the closet and put ___________ before I
left the apartment.

6. A: Have you seen Dan this morning?

B: Not this morning. I ran ___________ at the movie last night.

7. A: why do you look so worried?

B: I don’t have my homework. My mother threw ___________ with the trash this
morning. If Ms. Anthony calls ___________ in class to answer homework
questions, I’ll have to tell her what happened.

A: She’ll never believe your story. She’ll think you made ___________.

8. A: Miss Smith, our supply room is out of pencils again. Why are we always running
out of pencils? What is the problem?

B: I don’t know, sir. I’ll look ___________ right away.

13. Practice Work in pairs.

Speaker A: Read the cue. Your book is open.
Speaker B: Finish Speaker A’s sentence. Your book is closed.
Example: Speaker A: Yesterday I cleaned my closet. I found an old pair of shoes that I
don’t wear anymore. I didn’t keep the shoes. I threw…… (book
open)
Speaker B: ………… them away/out. (book closed)

1. The teacher gave us some important information in class yesterday. I didn’t want to
forget it, so I wrote ………

2. When I raised my hand in class, the teacher called ……….

3. I was carrying a suitcase, but it was too heavy, so I put ……

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 94
 4. I didn’t know the meaning of a word, so I looked ……..

5. I haven’t finished my work. I’ll do it later. I’m going to put ……..

6. The lights were off in the dark room, so I turned ………

7. (…….) isn’t wearing his/her hat right now. When s/he got to class, s/he took ………

8. My pen just fell on the floor. Could you please pick……?

Switch roles.

9. I saw (……) at a concert last night. I was surprised when I ran ……..

10. When you finish using a stove, you should always be careful to turn ……

11. When I finished my test, I handed ……..

12. Is (…..) sleeping? Would you please wake …….?

13. What’s the answer to this problem? Have you figured ……..?

14. I don’t need this piece of paper anymore. I’m going to throw ……..

15. I had the flu last week, but now I’m okay. I got ……..

16. I told a story that wasn’t true. I made ………

Switch roles.

17. Name some means of transportation that you get on.

18. Name some that you get in.

19. Name some that you get off.

Switch roles.

20. Name some that you get out of.

21. Name some things that you turn on.

22. Name some things that you turn off.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 95
 Group C: Phrasal Verb (separable)
Verb Definition Example
Ask out … ask (someone) to go on a date Tom asked Mary out. They went to a
movie

Call back .. return a telephone call I’ll call you back tomorrow.

Call off…. cancel We called of the picnic due to bad

weather.

Call up….. make a telephone call I called up my friend in New York.

Give back.. return something to someone I borrowed Al’s pen, then I gave it back.

Hang up… hang on a hanger or a hook I hung my coat up in the closet.

Pay back.. return borrowed money to someone Thanks for the loan. I’ll pay you back
soon

Put away… put something in its usual/proper place I put the clean dishes away.

Put back… return something to its original place I put my papers back into my briefcase.

Put out… extinguish (stop) a fire, a cigarette We put out the campfire before we left.

Shut off… stop a machine or light, turn off I shut off my printer before I left the
office.

Try on…. put on clothing to see if it fits I tried on several pairs of shoes.

Turn down.. decrease the volume Sue turned down the music. It was too
loud

Turn up…. Increase the volume Al turned up the radio. He likes loud
music

14. Practice Complete the sentences with pronouns and particles.

1. A: Could you lend me a couple of bucks?
B: Sure.
A: Thanks. I’ll pay you back tomorrow.
2. A: The radio is too loud. Could you please turn _______________?

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 96
 B: Sure.
3. A: I can’t hear the TV. Could you please turn _______________?
B: I’d be glad to.
4. A: Have you heard from Jack lately?
B: No. I think I’ll call _______________ tonight and see how he is.
5. A: Someone’s at the door. Can I call _______________?
B: Sure
6. A: Where’s my coat?
B: I hung _______________.
7. A: Did you leave the water on?
B: No. I shut _______________ when I finished washing my hands.
8. A: May I borrow your calculator? I’ll give _______________ to you tomorrow.
B: Sure. Keep it as long as you need it.
9. A: You can’t smoke that cigarette in the auditorium. You’d better put ____________
before we go in.
B: Okay.
10. A: Do you have any plans for Saturday night?
B: Yes. I have a date. Jim asked _______________.
11. A: Did you take my eraser off my desk?
B: Yes, but I put _______________ on your desk when I was finished.
A: Oh, it’s not here.
B: Look under your notebook.
A: Ah. There it is. Thanks.
12. A: Your toys are all over the floor, kids. Before you go to bed, be sure to put
_______.
B: Okay, Daddy.
13. A: Did you go to Kathy’s party last night?
B: She didn’t have the party. She called_______________.
14. A: this is a nice-looking coat. why don’t you try _______________?
B: how much does it cost?
15. A: that’s Annie’s toy, Tommy. Give _______________ to her.
B: No!

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 97
15. Practice Complete the sentences with pronouns and particles.
Example Speaker A: I wanted to be sure to remember (Anna)’s phone number, so I
wrote….. (book open)
Speaker B: ……. it down. (book closed)

1. I can’t hear the tape. Could you please turn ……?

2. I dropped my book. Could you please pick …….?

3. This is a hard problem. I can’t figure …….

4. I bought these shoes a few days ago. Before I bought them, I tried……

5. Where’s your homework? Did you hand…..?

6. (…….) asked (…….) to go to a movie with him. He asked……..

7. We postponed the picnic. We put………

8. I didn’t know the meaning of a word, so I looked ………

9. We don’t need that light. Would you please turn …….?

10. My coat was too warm to wear inside, so I took ……..

(Switch roles if working in pairs.)

11. That music is too loud. Could you lease turn …..?

12. These papers are for the class. Could you please hand …….?

13. (…….) was going to have a party, but s/he canceled it. S/he called……

14. My coat is in the closet. I hung …….

15. The story I told wasn’t true. I made…….

16. I was cold. So I reached for my sweater and put……

17. (……) fell asleep in class, so I woke…….

18. I was finished with the tools, so I put …….

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 98
 19. I don’t need these papers, so I’m going to throw…….

20. Let’s listen to the radio. Would you please turn…….?

Group D: Phrasal Verb (separable)

Verb Definition Example
Cross out … draw a line through I crossed out the misspelled word.

Fill in…...... complete by writing in a blank space We fill in blanks in grammar exercises.

Fill out…… Write information on a form I filled out a job application.

Fill up……. fill completely with gas, water, etc We filled up the gas tank.

Find out….. discover information I found out where he lives.

Have on….. wear She has a blue blouse on.

Look over… examine carefully Look over your paper for errors.

Point out….. call attention to The teacher pointed out a misspelling.

Print out….. create a paper copy from a computer I finished the letter and print it out.

Tear down… destroy a building They tore down the old house.

Tear out (of).. remove (paper) by tearing I tore a page out of a magazine.

Tear up …. Tear into small pieces I tore up the secret note.

Turn around.. change to the opposite direction After a mile, we turned around

Turn back…. change to the opposite direction After a mile, we turned back

Turn over… turn the top side to the bottom I turned the paper over and wrote the back

16. Practice Complete the phrasal verb.

1. There was no name on the front of the paper, so I turned it over and looked on
the back

2. My wife pointed __________ an interesting article in the newspaper.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 99
 3. Before you submit the job application, look it __________ carefully to make sure
you’ve filled it __________ correctly.

4. A: Good news! I’ve been accepted at the University of Florida.

B: Great. When did you find __________?

A: I got a letter in the mail today.

5. A: My roommate moved last week. Before he left, he filled __________ a change-of-

address card at the post office, but I’m still getting some of his mail. What should I
do?

B: Cross __________ the old address on a letter and write in his new one. Also write
“please forward” on the letter. You don’t have to use another stamp.

6. How much does it cost to fill __________ your gas tank?

7. We’re doing an exercise. We’re filling __________ blanks with prepositions.

8. When I went to Dr. Green’s office for the first time, I had to fill __________ a long
form about my health history.

9. I made a mistake on the check I was writing, so I tore it __________ and wrote
another.

10. An old building was in the way of the new highway through the city, so they tore old
building __________.

11. Sam has his new suit __________ today. He looks very handsome.

12. My employer asked for the latest sales figures, so I went to my computer and quickly
printed __________ a new report.

13. I think we’re going in the wrong direction. Let’s turn __________.

17. Practice Work in pairs, in groups, or as a class.

Example Speaker A: When your cup is empty, you fill it …… (book open)
Speaker B: ……. up (book closed)

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 100
 1. I made a mistake, so I crossed it……

2. When you read your composition carefully for mistakes, you look it …..

3. When you’re done writing something on the computer and you want a hard copy,
you print it…..

4. You look in reference books when you want to find something …..

5. If you want to remove a page from your notebook, you tear it ……

6. If you destroy an old building, you tear it …..

7. If you tear something into many small pieces, you tear it …..

(Switch roles if working in pairs)

8. If you want to see the back of a piece of paper, you turn it …..

9. If you discover you are walking in the wrong direction, you turn ……

10. If you put water in a glass to the very top, you fill it …..

11. If you give information on an application form, you fill it …..

12. When you write words in a blank, you fill the blank …..

13. When you are wearing something, we say that you have it …..

14. When there’s something the teacher wants to make sure we notice, she points it…..

Group E: Phrasal Verb (separable)

Verb Definition Example
Blow out … extinguish (a match, a candle) He blew the candles out.

Bring back..... return She brought my books back to me.

Bring up….. (1) raise (children) The Lees brought up six children.

(2) mention, start to talk about He brought the news up in conversation.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 101
Cheer up…. make happier The good news cheered me up.

Clean up….. make neat and clean I cleaned up my apartment.

Give away…. donate, get rid off by giving I didn’t sell my old bike. I gave it away.

Help out…… assist (someone) Could you please help me out?

Lay off….. stop employment The company laid off 100 workers.

Leave on…. (1) not turn off (a light, a machine) Please, leave the light on

(2) not take off (clothing) I left my coat on at the movie theatre.

Take back… return She took a book back to the library.

Take out…. invite out and pay He took Mary out. They went to a movie.

Talk over …. discuss we talked the problem over.

Think over… consider I thought the problem over.

Work out…. solve out We worked the problem out.

18.Practice Complete the sentences.

1. When I am sad, my friends can always cheer me up .

2. These are bad economic times. Business are laying _______ hundreds of workers.

3. After I lit the candles, I blew _______ the match.

4. Jack and Ann are having some problems in their marriage, but they are trying hard to
work them _______.

5. When they have a problem, they always try to talk it _______ to make sure they are
communicating with each other.

6. A: I’m leaving. Should I turn the TV off?

B: no. please leave it _______.

7. Saturday night I took my parents _______ to a fancy restaurant.

8. After dinner, Michael help me clean _______ the kitchen.

9. I was brought _______ in the South.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 102
 10. You’re welcome to borrow my tools, but when you finish, please be sure to bring
them __________.

11. Don’t forget to take the video _______ to the store today.

12. I didn’t take off my hat when I came inside. I left it _______.

13. I hate to bring this problem _______, but we need to talk about it.

14. A: Are you going to accept the job offer?

B: I don’t know. I’m still thinking it _______.

15. I can’t sell this old sofa. I guess I’ll give it _______. Someone will be able to use it.

16. My parents usually help me _______ with a little money when I’m having troble
paying my bills.

19. Practice Work in pairs, in groups, or as a class.

Example Speaker A: If I am sad, you will try to cheer me ….. (book open)

Speaker B: …… up (book closed)

1. You need to return that book to the library. You need to take it …..

2. I lost my job. The company I’m working for laid me …..

3. If you don’t need the light from a candle anymore, you blow it…..

4. If we need to discuss something, we need to talk it …..

5. You walked into a clod building. Instead of taking your coat off, you left it ….

6. If you give your old clothes to charity, you give them …..

7. When we have a problem to solve, e need to work it ……

8. If I lend you something, I want you to return it to me. I want you to bring it …..

(Switch roles if working in pairs)

9. Parents feed, educate, and love their children. They bring their children…..
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 103
 10. When I finish using my computer, I don’t turn it off each time. Instead, I often leave
it…..

11. Someone offered you a job. Before you give an answer, you need some time to think
it …..

12. When you take guests to a restaurant and pay the bill, you take them …..

13. If you introduce a topic into a conversation, you bring it …..

14. If you make a mess, you need to clean it……

15. You rented a video. When you were finished with it, you took it…..

16. When friends need our assistance, we offer to help them…..

PHRASAL VERB: INTRANSITIVE

The machine broke down Some phrasal verbs are intransitive; i.e., they
Please come in are not followed by an object.
I fell down

Group F: Phrasal Verb (intransitive)

Verb Definition Example
Break down….. stop functioning properly My car broke down in the highway.

Break out….. happen suddenly War break out between the two countries.

Break up….. separate, end a relationship Ann and Tom broke up.

Come in….. enter a room or building May I come in?

Dress up….. put on nice clothes People usually dress up for weddings.

Eat out….. eat outside of one’s home Would you like to eat out tonight?

Fall down… fall to the ground I fell down and hurt myself.

Get up….. get out of bed in the morning What time did you get up this morning?

Give up… quit doing something or quit trying I can’t do it. I give up.

Go on….. continue Let’s not stop. Let’s go on

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 104
Go out….. not stay home Jane went out with her friends last night.

Grow up….. become an adult Jack grew up in Sweden.

Hang up…. end a telephone conversation When we finished talking, I hung up.

Move in (to)… start living in a new home Some people moved in next door to me.

Move out (of)… stop living at a place My roommate is moving out.

Show up…. come, appear Jack showed up late for the meeting.

Sit back…. put one’s back against a chair back Sit back and relax. I’ll get you a drink.

Sit down…. go from standing to sitting Please sit down.

Speak up…. speak louder I can’t hear you. You’ll have to speak up.

Stand up…. go from sitting to standing I stood up and walked to the door.

Start over…. begin again I lost count, so I started over.

Stay up…… not go to bed I stayed up late last night.

Take off….. ascend in an airplane The plane took off 30 minutes late.

20. Practice Complete the sentences.

1. A: Are you comfortable?

B: Yes. This is a very comfortable chair.

A: Good. Now just sit back and take it easy. There’s nothing to worry about.

2. A: I’m exhausted. I can’t go __________. I have to stop and rest.

B: Let’s sit in the shade of that tree. I’ll get you some water.

3. A: I don’t feel like cooking tonight. Let’s eat __________.

B: Okay. Where do you want to go?

4. A: Are you going to get dressed __________ for the symphony tonight?

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 105
 B: Yes. I think so. You?

5. A: What time do you usually get __________ in the morning?

B: Around seven.

6. A: Knock, knock. Hello? Is anyone here? Professor Cook?

B: Ah, Miss Sweeney. Hello. Come __________, come __________. Here, have a
seat. Please sit __________.

7. A: I couldn’t print out my composition.

B: Why not?

A: My printer broke __________.

8. A: Are you going to bed soon?

B: No. I think I’ll stay __________ for a while and read.

9. A: When I saw a pregnant woman on the crowded bus, I stood __________ and gave

her my seat.

B: Good for you. That’s very considerate.

10. A: I don’t feel like staying home. Let’s go __________ this evening. I’m bored.

B: How about going to a movie?

A: Great! Let’s go!

11. A: A riot broke __________ after the soccer finals.

B: I find it hard to believe that people riot over a sports event.

12. A: Are you all right? What happened?

B: I tripped on the rug and fell__________.

A: Let me help you up.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 106
 13. A: Shall we begin the meeting without Ms. Lane?

B: Yes. She’ll probably show __________ soon, but we can begin without her.

14. A: When are Bill and Gloria getting married?

B: They’re not. They broke __________.

15. A: Don’t forget that Grandma is a little hard of hearing.

B: I won’t. I’ll be sure to speak __________ when I’m talking to her.

16. There’s an empty apartment next to mine. My neighbors moved __________. Why
don’t you move __________? It’d be fun to live next door to each other.

17. A: It’s been fun talking to you, but I need to hang __________ now.

B: Okay. Let’s talk again tomorrow.

18. I cannot solve this math problem. I give __________.

19. Dan had trouble figuring out what to say in his letter to his girlfriend. He had to start
__________ three times.

20. My flight was supposed to leave at 6:30, but the plane didn’t take __________ until
nearly 8:00.

21. Practice Work in pairs, in groups, or as a class.

Example Speaker A: Don’t stop. I’m enjoying your story. Please go….. (book open)
Speaker B: …… on (book closed)
1. If I’m sitting and then get to my feet, I stand ……

2. If you don’t feel like staying at home, you go ……

3. When you put on nice clothes for a special affair, you dress ……

4. If you’re not tired at night, instead of going bed you stay …..

5. When you play soccer, sometimes you fall …..

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 107
 6. When a fax machine stops working, you say that it broke…..

7. You walk to a chair, and then you sit …..

Switch role.

8. If you relax into the chair, you sit…..

9. If two people end a relationship, they break…..

10. After you stop sleeping in the morning, you get …..

11. If you continue to do something and don’t stop, you go …..

12. If a war begins, you say that it broke …..

13. If I invite you to enter my house, I say “Please come ……”

14. If you eat at a restaurant instead of at home, you eat ……

15. If you ask someone to speak more loudly, you ask them to speak…..

16. When someone arrives for a meeting, you say that he or she shows…..

17. When you decide a problem is impossible to solve, you give ……

18. An airplane increases its speed on the runway, and then it takes……

THREE-WORD PHRASAL VERBS

Some two-word verbs (e.g., drop in) can become
three-word verbs (e.g., drop in on).
Drop in is not followed by an object. It is an
Last night some friends dropped in. intransitive phrasal verb (i.e., it is not followed by
an object)
Drop in on is a three-word phrasal verb. Three-
Let’s drop in on Alice this afternoon.
word phrasal verb. Three-word phrasal verbs are
transitive (they are followed by objects).
We dropped in on her last week. Three-word phrasal verb are non-separable (the
noun or pronoun follows the phrasal verb).

Group G: Phrasal Verb (three-word)

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 108
 Verb Definition Example
Drop in (on)…. visit without calling first or We dropped in on my aunt.
without an invitation
Drop out (of)….. stop attending (school) Beth dropped out of graduate school.

Fool around (with).. have fun while wasting time My son likes to fool around with his
friends on the weekends.

Get along (with)…. have a good relationship with I get along well with my roommate.

Get back (from)…. return from (a trip) When did you get back from Hawaii?

Get through (with).. finish I got through with my work before noon.

Grow up (in)…. Become an adult Hamid grew up in Sweden.

Look out (for)…. Be careful Look out for that car!

Run out (of)….. finish the supply of (something) We run out of gas.

Sign up (for)…. Put one’s own name on a list Did you sign up for the school trip?

Watch out (for)…. Be careful Watch out for that car!

22. Practice Complete the phrasal verbs.

1. Look out ! There’s a car coming!

2. Look out for that car!

3. Where did you grow__________?

4. I grew __________ __________ Springfield.

5. I couldn’t finish the examination. I ran __________ __________ time.

6. A: What did you do yesterday?

B: Nothing much. I just fooled __________.

7. A: Hi, Chris! What’s up? I haven’t seen you in a long time. Where have you been?

B: I went to California last week to visit my brother.

A: Oh? When did you get __________ __________ California?

B: Just yesterday.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 109
 8. A: Where’s Jack? He hasn’t been in class for at least two weeks.

B: He dropped __________ __________ school.

9. A: Watch __________ __________ that truck!

B: What truck?

10. A: What time do you expect to get __________ __________ your homework?

B: In about an hour, as soon as I finish reading this chapter.

11. A: I haven’t seen the Grants for a long time. Let’s drop __________ __________
them this evening.

B: We’d better call first. They may not like unexpected company.

12. A: I want to change my room in the dorm.

B: Why?

A: I don’t get __________ __________ my roommate.

13. A: I signed __________ __________ Mrs. Grant’s art class.

B: You’re lucky. I tried to sign __________ too, but it was full.

Group H: Phrasal Verb (three-word)

Verb Definition Example
Come along (with)…accompany Do you want to come along with us?

Come over (to)……..visit the speaker’s place Some friend are coming over tonight.

Cut out (of)………. remove with scissors or knife I cut an article out of today’s paper.

Find out (about)…. discover information about When did you find out about the
problem?

Get together (with).. join, meet Let’s get together after work today.

Go back (to)….. return to a place I went back to work after my illness.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 110
Go over (to)….. (1) approach I went over to the window.

(2) visit another’s home Let’s go over to Jim’s tonight.

Hang around (with)... spend undirected, idle time John likes to hang around the coffee
shop

Hang out (with)…… spend undirected, idle time Kids like to hang out with each other.

Keep away (from)…. not give to Keep matches away from children.

Set out (for)…… begin a trip We set out for our destination at dawn.

Sit around (with)… sit and do nothing You can’t just sit around. Do something.

23. Practice Complete the sentences.

1. A: Are you busy tonight?

B: No.

A: Would you like to come along with us to the movie?

2. A: I need to talk to you. When can we get ___________?

B: How about tomorrow morning?

3. My teenage daughter is lazy. All she wants to do is hang ___________ ___________

her friends.

4. I saw a young child who was all alone. He was crying. I went _________ _________
him and asked if I could sleep.

5. How did you find ___________ ___________ the change in the schedule?

6. It’s a long trip. We’d better set ___________ early.

7. Keep that cat ___________ ___________ me! I’m allergic.

8. Do you want to come ___________ tonight? We could watch a movie or something.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 111
 9. There was a funny cartoon in the newspaper. I cut it ___________ for my aunt.

10. A: I was born in Vietnam, but I haven’t been there for many years.

B: Do you expect to go ___________ ___________ Vietnam again someday?

A: Yes.

11. A: What did you do at your aunt’s?

B: Not much. We just sat ___________ and talked about the relatives who weren’t
there.

A. ask out…………………... Ask (someone) to go on date

B. blow out………………... Extinguish (a match, a candle)

break down…………….. Stop functioning properly
break out……………….. Happen suddenly
break up………………… Separate, end a relationship
bring back………………. Return
bring up…………………. (1) raise (children)
(2) mention, start to talk about

C. call back………………… return a telephone call

call off………………….. cancel
call on………………….. ask (someone) to speak in class
call up………………….. make a telephone call
cheer up………………… make happier
clean up………………… make neat and clean
come along (with)……… accompany
come from……………… originate
come in………………… enter a room or building
come over (to)…………. visit the speaker’s place
cross out………………. draw a line through
cut out (of)…………….. remove with scissors or knife

D. dress up………………… put on nice clothes

drop in (on)…………….. visit without calling first or without an invitation
drop out (of)…………… stop attending (school)

E. eat out…………………. eat outside of one’s home

F. fall down………………. fall to the ground

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 112
 figure out………………. find the solution to a problem

CHAPTER 3

SIMPLE TENSES

I. SIMPLE PRESENT TENSE

A. The simple present tense.
Form : Janet works in an office.
She sits at her desk and types on a computer.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 113
 Subject Verb Subject Verb
I He
You She
Work. Works.
We It
They
The verb after he, she, or takes a final –s .

Function : She speaks on the telephone

And types on her computer.
We use the simple tense when we talk about what people do all the time, or again
and again.
1. Practice
Read the sentence about a typical day for Janet. Underline the correct form of the
verb.
1. The alarm clock (ring/rings) at 7.00 every morning.
2. Janet (turn/turns) off the alarm clock.
3. She (get/gets) up.
4. She (walk/walks) to the bathroom.
5. She (take/takes) a shower
6. She (comb/combs) her hair.
7. Janet says,” I (brush/brushes) my teeth every morning.
8. She (put/puts) on her clothes.
9. Janet (eat/eats) breakfast with her sister Meg.
10. They drink/drinks) coffee.
11. They (eat/eats) cereal.
12. They (watch/watches) the news on the television.
13. Meg (stay/stays) home.
14. They (say/says) goodbye.
15. Janet(lock/locks) the door.
16. She (wait/waits) for the bus.
17. She (get/gets) on a bus.
18. She (pay/pays) the bus driver.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 114
 19. She (sit/sits) down on a seat.
20. She (get/gets) off the bus at the same place every day.
2. Practice
A. Write five things you do every day.
1. I get up at 7. 30 ________________________________________ .
2. _____________________________________________________ .
3. _____________________________________________________ .
4. _____________________________________________________ .
5. _____________________________________________________ .
B. Write five things a friend does every day.
1. _____________________________________________________ .
2. _____________________________________________________ .
3. _____________________________________________________ .
4. _____________________________________________________ .
5. _____________________________________________________ .

B. Adverbs of frequency

Form : Penguins never fly.

Penguins usually eat fish.
Penguins often swim.
Always, usually, often, sometimes, rarely, and never are adverbs of frequency. We
often use them with simple present tense verbs. They come between the subject
and the verb.

Subject Adverb of Frequency Simple present Tense

I always do my homework.
You Usually get up early
Tony Often listens to the radio.
She sometimes drinks tea.
We Rarely go to the teather.
Penguins never fly

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 115
 Function: Brenda always walks home from school.

Adverbs of frequency tell us how many times something happens.

Mon. Tues. Wed Thurs. Fri. Sat. Sun.

I always walk in the 100

morning.
Julia usually walks in
the morning
We often walks in the
morning
You sometimes walk in
the morning.
Mel and Sue rarely
walk in the morning. 0%
Satoshi never walk in
the morning.

3. Practice
Add the verbs of frequency on the left to each sentence.
1. I get up at 7.00.
Always I always get up at 7.00.____________________ .

2. I have breakfast at 7.30

Usually _______________________________________ .

3. I drink two cups of tea for breakfast.

Often _______________________________________ .

4. I eat eggs for breakfast

Never _______________________________________ .

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 116
 5. I watch the morning news on television
Sometimes _______________________________________ .

6. I listen to the radio at home.

Rarely _______________________________________ .

7. I read the newspaper in the morning.

Usually _______________________________________ .

8. I lock my door
Always _______________________________________ .

9. I take the bus to work

Usually _______________________________________ .

10. I take a taxi.

Rarely _______________________________________ .

11. I get to work on time.

Often _______________________________________ .

12. I arrive late.

Sometimes _______________________________________ .

4. Practice
What do you do on weekday’s evenings? Use Always, usually, often, sometimes,
rarely, or never with the following phrases or your own.

Example : I rarely go to the movies on weekday evenings.

1. Eat dinner early 6. Speak English

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 117
 2. Watch TV 7. Go to the movies
3. Go to bed late 8. Do homework
4. Read magazines 9. Stay at home
5. See friends 10. Drink tea after dinner.

C. Adverbs of Frequency with Be

Form : Yukio is always on time
Yukio is never late.
He always catches his tray at 7.00.
Yukio is late today he is very upset.
a. We put adverbs of frequency after the verb be.

Subject Simple Present Tense of Be Adverb of Frequency

Always
Usually
Often
Ted Is Late
Sometime
Rarely
Never

b. We put adverbs of frequency before all other verbs.

Subject Adverb of Frequency Simple present tense verb

Ted Sometimes Comes Late

5. Practice
Add the adverb of frequency on the left to each sentence.
1. Always Yukio is on time. Yukio is always on time .
2. Always Yukio comes to work on time. __________________ .
3. Never Yukio is sick. __________________ .
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 118
 4. Usually He works on Sunday. __________________ .
5. Sometimes He is at work on Sunday. __________________ .
6. Sometimes He feels tired. __________________ .
7. Rarely He is home early. __________________ .
8. Often He works late at the office. __________________ .
9. Rarely He takes a vocation. __________________ .
10. Never He misses a meeting. __________________ .
11. Usually He is in his office __________________ .
12. Rarely He is late with his work. __________________ .
13. Often He goes to bed late __________________ .
14. Often He is at his desk at lunch __________________ .
15. Rarely He has time for his family __________________ .

6. Your Turn
Write six things about what you do every day with Always, usually, often, sometimes,
rarely, or never. Use the following phrases or your own.

get up drink tea exercise early/late to school

do homework go to bed

1. I always go to bed late___________________________________ .

2. _____________________________________________________ .
3. _____________________________________________________ .
4. _____________________________________________________ .
5. _____________________________________________________ .
6. _____________________________________________________ .

D. Spelling and Pronunciation of Final –s and –es

Form : Every evening, Len sits in front of the television, drinks his coffee, watches
his favorite program, and falls asleep.

Verb Spelling Examples Pronunciation

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 119
 Verbs ends in the Add -s He likes coffee /s/
sound f//k/p/t/ like He works.
work sleep It sleeps.
Verbs ends in the Add -s He swims. /z/
sound She reads.
b/d/g/l/m/n/r/v/ or He runs.
vowel. Swim read
run
Verb ends in Add -es She watches TV. /iz/
/ch/sh/s//x/z/. watch He dresses.
dress finish It finishes at 10.00
Verbs ends in Drop y, He worries a lot. /z/
consonant + y. Add -ies The baby cries at night.
worry cry hurry She hurries to work.
Verbs ends in vowel Add -s He plays football. /z/
+ y. play stay buy She stays at home.
He buys food.

7. Practice
Write the third person singular of the following verbs in the correct column, and
then read them out loud.
Ask dance kiss pass see try
Begin drink like play speak walk
Brush eat look put stay wash
Buy fix miss rain stop wish
Catch fly open say teach write

/s/ /iz/ /z/

Puts_ brushes___ says_____
_____________ _ ____________ ____________
_____________ _ ____________ ____________

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 120
 _____________ _ ____________ ____________
_____________ _ ____________ ____________
_____________ _ ____________ ____________
_____________ _ ____________ ____________
_____________ _ ____________ ____________
_____________ _ ____________ ____________
_____________ _ ____________ ____________

8. Practice
Complete the sentences with the third person singular of the verb in parentheses.
Then circle the correct pronunciation for each verb.

Dan Thomas (come) comes (/s/z/iz/) from Canada but he ( live) ________
(/s/z/iz/)in New York. He (teach) _______ (/s/z/iz/) English. He like ________
(/s/z/iz/) to walk, so he (walk) _________ (/s/z/iz/) to school everyday. He always
(arrive) _______ (/s/z/iz/) in class on time. He (enjoy) __________ (/s/z/iz/) his job
and (leave) _______ (/s/z/iz/) his students. he never (miss) ______ (/s/z/iz/) a class.
He usually (give) _______ (/s/z/iz/) a lot of homework and (ask) ________ (/s/z/iz/) a
lot of question in class. He always (correct) ________ (/s/z/iz/) the homework and
(give) _________ (/s/z/iz/) the homework back the next day. He (speak) _______
(/s/z/iz/) English fast and always (forget) ________ (/s/z/iz/) the names of the
students. He (finish) ______ (/s/z/iz/) the class late.

9. Practice
Is Dan Thomas a good or bad teacher? Why?

10. Practice
Complete the sentences about Wendy with the words on the left.
1. Try always Wendy always tries _____ hard.
2. Study, usually She ____________________ in the library after class.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 121
 3. Worry, often She ____________________ about her homework and
her tests.
4. Stay, never She ____________________ out with her friends after School.
5. Play, rarely She ____________________ sports or games.
6. Enjoy, rarely She ____________________ her life.
7. Be, often She ____________________ unhappy.
8. Cry, sometimes She ____________________ .
9. Say, usually She ____________________ she is happy and fine
10. Look, often But she _________________ sad.

E. Irregular Verbs : Have, Do, and Go

Form : Kathy’s classes finish at 4.00 every day.
Then she goes home.
She has a cup of coffee and does her homework.
The third person forms of have go and do are irregular.

I have a job He
She has a problem.
It
I do the homework He
She does the work.
It
I go to work He
She goes outside.
It

11. Practice
Complete the sentences about Kathy and Kay with the verbs in parentheses.
1. Both Kathy and Kay (go) __go__ to work.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 122
 2. Kathy (go) ______ to work in a hospital.
3. Kay (go) _______ to work in a big hospital.
4. Both Kathy and Kay (have) _____ cars.
5. Kathy (have) ______ a big car.
6. Kay (have) ______ a small car.
7. Both Kathy and Kay (do) _______ yoga to be healthy.
8. Kathy (do) _______ yoga in a gym.
9. Kay (do) _________ yoga at home.
10.
12. Practice
Complete the sentences with the words in parentheses. Use the simple present
tense.
Mike (have) ____has_____ two classes in the morning. At 12:00, he
1
(finish) ___________ his classes and (go) ____________ to the cafeteria. He
2 3
(eat)_____________ lunch with his classmate. After lunch, he (study/usually)
4
_____________________ in the library. His teachers (give/often) _________
5 6
________ a lot of homework. Then, he (take) _______________ the bus to his
7
uncle’s garage.

He (enjoy) _________________ his work at the garage. He (fix)

8
_________ cars and (talk) ___________ to people. His uncle (pay) _________
9 10 11
him every week. The garage (close) _______________ at 8.00
12
After work, Mike (walk) _____________ home. The garage is near his
13
apartment. Mike (have) _____________ a roommate, Len. Len (be) _______
14 15
very nice. He (try, always) __________________ to help Mike. Len and Mike
16

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 123
 (cook) _____________ dinner and the they (eat) _________________ in the
17 18
kitchen. They (talk, always) ___________________ a lot. Len ( do, always)
19
__________________ the dishes. They (watch, usually) _________________
20 21
television. They (like) _______________ football and other sports on TV.
22
They (go, often) __________________ to bed late.
23
13. Practice
Say three things a person does in his or her job. Your partneror the class guesses
the job.
Example :
You : He/she has long holidays. He/she works with young people.
He/she gives homework.
Your partner : Teacher.
F. Have and Has
Form : He has the flu.
He has a temperature.
He has a thermometer in his mouth.
He has a headache too.
He has an ice-pack on his head.

Singular Plural
I We
You Have

He You
She
Has a book. They Have books.
It

Function : We use has and have :

1. For things we possess or own.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 124
 I have a car. She has two houses.
2. To describe people, places, anima, and things.
It has two windows. She has black hair.
3. For our families and people we know.
I have a son. She has a friend from Canada.
4. With some expressions like the following.

Have a cold /the flu The children have a cold this week.
Have a temperature I have a temperature.
Have a headache/toothache Gloria has a toothache.
Have a problem We have a problem.

14. Practice
Complete the sentences with have or has.
Sam ____has_____ a good job. He ___________ a wife, Kate. They
1 2
___________ two children. Kate ____________ a goog job too. She is a
3 4
teacher. They ______________ one car and they ______________ a small
5 6
house. The house _____________ two bedrooms. It ____________ a garden,
7 8
too. The garden ______________ trees and flowers. Sam and his family are
9
happy. They ___________ a good life.
10
15. Practice
Complete the sentence with is or has.
1. Sam ____is____ young. 5. He _________ sick.
2. He __________ 28 years old. 6. He _________ a cold.
3. He __________ healthy. 7. He _________ a headache too.
4. Today Sam ___________ a problem 8. Sam ________ at home today.

16. Practice

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 125
 A. From the following list, tell your partner five things you have. Use the list for
ideas.
apartment car house problem
brother/sister dictionary job
Example:
I have a sister

B. Write five sentences that tell what your partner has.

Example :
She has a brother and a sister.
1. ________________________________________________ .
2. ________________________________________________ .
3. ________________________________________________ .
4. ________________________________________________ .
5. ________________________________________________ .

G. The Simple Present Tense: Negative

Form/function: Len doesn’t walk in the evenings.
Len doesn’t see his friends.
Len doesn’t go out.
Len watches television and eats chips.

1. In the present tense negative statements, do and does are auxiliary verbs. The base
verb does not take an -s for the third person singular. The –s ending is on the
helping verb (does).

Subject Do Not/Does not

I
You do not
We don’t
They work.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 126
 She does not
He doesn’t
It

2. We usually use contractions when we speak we often use contractions when we

write.

Contractions
do not don’t
does not doesn’t

17. Practice
Complete the negative sentence with the words on the left.
1. Understand, not I like my husband Len but I _don’t understand
him.
2. Want, not He always tired. He _____________________
to go out.
3. Talk, not He watches TV all the time. He _____________
to me.
4. Go, not we _______________________ to the movies.
5. Eat, not He eats only chip and pizza. He _____________
salads.
6. Drink, not He always drink coffee. He ________________
Water.
7. Like, not He likes to watch sports on TV. He __________
to exercise.
8. Have, not We ____________________ many friends.
9. Call, not His friends _______________________.
10. See, not His mother _______________________ him.
11. Speak, not his daughter ______________________ to him.
12. Know, not Poor Len, I _____________________ what to do.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 127
18. Practice
Write true sentences with these words. Make the sentence negative where
necessary.
1. Birds/give milk Birds don’t give milk_____________ .
2. Fish/swim ______________________________ .
3. A chicken/come from an egg ______________________________ .
4. Plants/need/water to grow ______________________________ .
5. Penguins/live/Italy ______________________________ .
6. Elephants/eat/chickens ______________________________ .
7. Rice/grows/on trees ______________________________ .
8. The Chinese/drink/tea ______________________________ .
9. Rain/come from/ the sky ______________________________ .
10. Lions/eat/meat ______________________________ .
11. A chicken/give/milk ______________________________ .
12. Giraffes/live/ in Africa ______________________________ .

19. Practice
Complete the sentences with the negative of the verbs from the list.
be get up look at sit wait
eat go put on talk worry

It is August. The sun is hot. There _____aren’t_____ any clouds in the sky.
1
Tony is in Hawaii. He _______________________ early. He gets up at 11.00.
2
He ____________________ his shirt and tie. He puts on his short. He ______
3
________ to work. He goes to the beach. He _________________ for the bus.
4 5
He waits for his friends. Tony and his friends _________________ in front of
6
Computers. They sit in front of a table in a café on the beach.
They ____________________ about work. They talk about fun things to
7

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 128
 do. They _______________________ sandwiches. They eat delicious food.
8
They ________________________ computers. They look at the blue sea.
9
Tony ________________________ about his work. He is happy and relaxed.
10
But Tony isn’t on vocation. He is in his office. It’s just a dream.

20. Practice
Say six things you do and six things you don’t do on the weekend. Use phrases
from the list or your own.
Get up early study English go to school
do homework Go to the store clean your own room
see friends play sports have breakfast
Example :
I don’t get up early. I get up late.

H. The Simple Present Tense: Yes/No Questions

Form/function: Meg: Does wear glasses?
Linda: Yes, she does.
Meg: Does he wear glasses all the time?
Linda: Yes, he does.
1. We use do or does to make the question in the simple present. We always use the
base from after do or does.
2. We often use do or does in short answer to questions.

YES/NO QUESTIONS SHORT ANSWER

Do/Does Subject Base verb Affirmative Negative
Yes, No,
I You do. You don’t
You I/we do. I/we don’t
Do
We You do. You don’t
They They do. They don’t

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 129
 He Work? He does. He doesn’t
Does She She does. She doesn’t
It It does. It doesn’t

21. Practice
Penny wants to marry Tim. Her mother asks her questions about him. Write
questions with do or does. Give short answers.
1. you/love him Do you love him_____________?
yes Yes, I do_______________
2. you/know his family ___________________________?
yes _______________________
3. he/ have a good job ___________________________?
yes _______________________
4. he/ live in a nice apartment. ____________________________?
yes _______________________
5. he/drive a nice car ____________________________?
yes _______________________
6. he/wear nice clothes ____________________________?
yes _______________________
7. he/smoke ____________________________?
no _______________________
8. he/buy you nice gifts ____________________________?
yes _______________________
9. he/take you out ____________________________?
yes _______________________
10. he/want to marry you. ____________________________?
no _______________________

22. Read
Read about Tony Ku. With a partner, ask ten questions with is, do, or does. Give
short answers.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 130
 This is Tony Ku. He is a student in New York City. Tony lives in New York
city, but he comes from Singapore. His family lives in Singapore he misses his
family. His brother and sister come to visit him in New York every year. He is very
happy when they are with him. He goes to school every day. He speaks English
and wants to be an actor. In the evening, he works in a restaurant. He is a waiter.
He is very good waiter. People love him.
Example:
You: Is he a student in New York City?
Your partner: Yes, he is

23. Your Turn

You are looking for a roommate. Ask your partner six questions with be or do.
Use the following words or your own. Your partner gives short answers.

Clean go to bed late like parties

Cook have many smoke

Example:
You : Do you listen to loud music?
Your partner: No, I don’t

I. The Simple Present Tense: Wh- Questions

Form/function: Sue: Where do kangaroos come from?
Ken: Australia.
Sue: What do they eat?
Ken: Plants. (They eat plants.)
Sue: When do they sleep?
Ken: in the day(They sleep in the daytime)
1. We often call where, when, what, why, who, how, and how many wh- question
words because most of them start with the letters wh. We use wh. We use wh-
question words to get information.
2. We put question words before do and does.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 131
 3. Frequency adverbs like usually come after the subject in a question.
When do you usually get up? I usually get up at seven.

Wh- Word Do/Does Subject Base Verb

What do I do?
Where does He live?
When do They sleep?
Why do You get up early?
Who does She call?
How many do They have?
How do You go?

II. SIMPLE PAST TENSE

A. Spelling of Regular Past Tense Verbs
Form: The baby cried and cried.
Then it looked at me and stopped.

Verb Ending Spelling Rule Examples

1. Most regular verbs Add –ed. rain rained
point pointed
2. Verb ends in e. Add –d. arrive arrived
smile smiled
3. Verb ends in consonant Change y to i try tried
+y and add -ed carry carried
4. Verbs ends in vowel + y Add –ed. enjoy enjoyed
play played
5. Verb ends in one Double the stop stopped
consonant + vowel + consonant and rub rubbed
consonant (one- add -ed
syllable verbs).

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 132
 6. Verbs ends in x, w. Add –ed. show showed
fix fixed
7. Verb ends in vowel + Add –ed. visit visited
consonant and stress is Do not double answer answered
on the first syllable the consonant.
(two-syllable verb)
8. Verb ends in vowel + double the prefer preferred
consonant and stress is consonant and occur occurred
on the syllable (two- add –ed.
syllable).

1. Practice
Write the correct spelling of the simple past tense form.
Base Verbpast tense verb Base verb Past tense verb
1. Add ___added____ 11. Stop ____________
2. Carry ____________ 12. Hurry ____________
3. Allow ____________ 13. Wait ____________
4. Show ____________ 14. Stay ____________
5. Count ____________ 15. Cry ____________
6. Erase ____________ 16. Drop ____________
7. Fit ____________ 17. Study ____________
8. Marry ____________ 18. Taste ____________
9. Die ____________ 19. Cook ____________
10. Fail ____________ 20. Worry ____________

2. Practice
Work with a partner. Read the verbs from one list. Your partner writes the simple
past tense. Then your partner reads the verb from the list and you write the
simple past tense. Share your answer.

List A List B
1. Listen _____________ 1. Start _____________

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 133
 2. Mix _____________ 2. Study _____________
3. Smile _____________ 3. Fix _____________
4. Kiss _____________ 4. Refer _____________
5. Pick _____________ 5. Hug _____________
6. Shop _____________ 6. Touch _____________
7. Tip _____________ 7. Live _____________
8. Reply _____________ 8. Clap _____________
9. Open _____________ 9. Enter _____________
10. Permit _____________ 10. Occur _____________
11. Happen _____________ 11. Offer _____________
12. Prefer _____________ 12. Admit _____________
3. Practice
Now write the postcard and complete the sentences. Use the simple past of the
verbs from the list.
Arrive climb enjoy prefer shop walk
Carry decide enter rain visit watch

Dear Mom and Dad,

Greetings from New York! We __arrived_
1
last Friday. It _________ all weekend, so we
2
_________ umbrellas. We __________ in the
3 4
big stores on the fifth Avenue, but I _________
5
the small shops in the East Village. We

________ the statue of Liberty. We ________

6 7
at her feet and _________ up to her head. That
8 Mr. and Mrs. Bronson

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 134
 was great! We __________ around the central 1925 Frankin Avenue
9 Los Angeles, CA 90027
park and Chinatown and even _____________
10
a parade in the streets. Last night, we _______
11
go to Little Italy to have dinner. The food was

delicious and we _____________ the lovely

12
Italian musician.

4. Your turn
Write a postcard to a friend telling him or her about a place you visited. Use the
verbs from the list or use your own. Use the simple past tense.
Camp hike shop swim watch
Climb plan ski try waters
Go boating read snow visit

Dear _______________,

Greetings from _____________________

_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
See you soon

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 135
 ________________
5. Practice
Complete the sentences with the verb in the parentheses. Use the present
progressive, simple present, or simple past.

Jennifer: Hello Brad. It’s Jennifer. How (be) ____are____ you?

1
Brad: I (be) _____________ fine, Jennifer. I have (arrive) _________
2 3
in Hawaii yesterday morning and right now I (walk)_________
4
on the beach, and I (talk) ___________ to you.
5
Jennifer: It (sound) _____________ wonderful! (think) __________ you
6 7
_______________ about.
8
Brad: Of course, I (think) _____________ about all the work you
9
have in the office.
Jennifer: Yes, I (have) ______________ so much work. By the way,
10
Tommy Jones (call) ____________ you at the office yesterday.
11
He (ask)___________ about you and (want) _____________
12 13
to speak to you. I (say) ___________ you (be) _____________
14 15
Out of town.
Brad: Good.

Jennifer: By the way, where(stay) __________ you _____________?

16 17
Brad: I (stay) _____________ at the Sands Hotel on Waiki Beach. I
18
(have) ______________ a beautiful room.
19

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 136
 Jennifer: (have) _____________ it _____________ a view?
20 21
Brad: Yes, it ( have) ______________ a beautiful view of the ocean.
22
Jennifer: How (be) _____________ the meeting yesterday?
23
Brad: The meeting (be) ___________ fine. After the meeting we all
24
(walk) ____________ to a restaurant on the beach. The waiter
25
(offer) ______________ us a table under the stars and (allow)
26
_______________ us to choose the music. And we (dance) ___
27
_____________ all night. I really enjoy _______________ it.
28 29
Jennifer: Oh, really? You (dance) ______________ ! who with?
30

6. What Do You Think?

What does Brad say next? Write the next two lines of their conservation in
Practice 13.

Example:
Brad: Oh, just a woman from the meeting.
Jennifer: Was she a good dancer?

7. Your Turn
Write a sentence about yourself in the simple past tense with each of these verbs.
1. Visit I visited my grandparents last summer.___________________
__________________________________________________
2. Prefer ___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________
3. Admit ___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 137
 4. Answer ___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________

B. Pronunciation of –ed : /t/, /d/,/and /id/

Form : Elizabeth graduated last summer.
I wanted to take her picture, so
She smiled and I photographed her
With some of her friends.

Verb Ending Pronunciation Examples

1. Verb ends in helped
Voiceless p, k, f, /t/ washed
s, sh, ch. cooked
2. Verbs ends in
voiced b, g, v, z, played
zh, th, j, m, n, ng, /d/ lived
l, r, or a vowel rained
sound.
3. Verb ends in d or waited
t. /id/ wanted
needed

8. Practice
Complete the sentence with the simple past tense of the verbs. Then read the
sentences aloud and check the box for the pronunciation of each verb.

/t/ /d/ /id/

Luis (open) __opened__ his eyes. ________ ________ ________
1
The hands on the clock (point)___ ________ ________ ________

________ to 9: 20. He (yawn) ___ ________ ________ ________

2
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 138
 _________ and __________ in bed ________ ________ ________
3 4
Until 10;30 then he (shower) _______ ________ ________ ________
5
And (shave) _________. ________ ________ ________
6
He (dress) __________ at 12: 00 and ________ ________ ________
7
(finish) __________ at around 1:00 then ________ ________ ________
8
he (walk) ___________ to the café on ________ ________ ________
9
The corner and (order) _______ breakfast ________ ________ ________
10
He (enjoy) ___________it as usual ________ ________ ________
11
It (start) __________ to rain, so he (call) ________ ________ ________
12
_______ his friend and (invite) _______ ________ ________ ________
13 14
him to his apartment to watch videos. ________ ________ ________

His friend (arrive) _______ at 06:00 P.M ________ ________ ________

15
and they (watch) _________ videos ________ ________ _______
16
and they laugh _________ a lot. ________ ________ ________
17
At 10:00 P.M the rain (stop) _________ ________ ________ ________
18
and his friend (want) __________ to go ________ ________ ________
19
back home. It was now 11:00 P.M., and ________ ________ ________

Luis (return) _________ to his favorite ________ ________ ________

20
place his bed!.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 139
9. Practice
Complete the sentences with the simple past tense of the verbs from the list. Then
circle the final –ed sound: /t/, /d/, or /id/.
Answer dry need shop turn on watch
Cook fold play talk wash

At 8:30 A.M. yesterday, Ann ___played__ ( /t/, /d/, /id/) tennis with a
1
Friend. At 10: 00, she __________ ( /t/, /d/, /id/) her clothes. Then she
2
_________ ( /t/, /d/, /id/)her clothes in the dryer and ________ ( /t/, /d/, /id/)
3 4
Them. At 12:00, she ___________ ( /t/, /d/, /id/) lunch. After lunch, she
5
___________ ( /t/, /d/, /id/) her computer and _____________ ( /t/, /d/, /id/)
6 7
her e-mail. Then she ___________ ( /t/, /d/, /id/) on the telephone with her
8
Friends. She ___________ ( /t/, /d/, /id/) to buy a birthday gift for a friend.
9
So, she ___________ ( /t/, /d/, /id/) in the stores for a gift. By 9:00 P.M. she
10
was at home and tired, so she _____________ ( /t/, /d/, /id/) television.
11

10. Practice
Talk about yesterday. Say two things that you did using each of the following
verbs.
enjoy finish need
Example :

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 140
 Yesterday, I finished exercise 10 in my grammar book.

C. The Simple Past Tense: Irregular Verbs

Form : She went to Africa last year.
She saw a chimpanzee there.
Many verbs do not use the-ed form. the past form of these verb is irregular.

Subject Past Form of Verb (to go)

I
You
Went to Africa last year
He/She/It
We
They

The following are common irregular verbs. For more irregular verbs, see page 000

Base Form Past Form

be was/were
Become Became
Begin Began
Buy bought
Come Came
Do Did
Eat Ate
Drink Drank
Feel Felt
Fly flew
Get Got
Give Gave
Go Went

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 141
 Have Had
Hear Heard
Make Made
Meet Met
Put Put
See Saw
Sit Sat
Sleep Slept
read* read*
Stand Stood
Take Took
Teach Taught
Tell Told
Think thought
*The base form read rhymes with need. The past form read is pronounced like
red.
11. Practice
Complete the sentences with the simple past tense of the regular and irreguler
verbs in parentheses.
A Trip to Paris

Last April, Pete and Paula (fly) ___flew___ to Paris from New York.
1
They (find) _____________ a small hotel in the center town. The hotel
2
(be, not) __________________ expensive, and it (be) ______________ clean.
3 4
Every morning, they (eat) _____________ French bread and (drink)
5
_______________ strong French coffee. They (take) ______________ the
6 7
Metro all the time. They (hear) _______________ people sing in the subway.
8
One day, they (make) _________________ friends with a French
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 142
 9
person. They (be) ______________ lucky because he (speak) _____________
10 11
English. He (tell) _______________ them all the interesting places to visit. He
12
(teach) _______________ them two French words, bonjour and merci. They
13
(take) _______________ a trip on the river Seine, and they (see) ___________
14 15
a lot of interesting places.

One day, they (go) ____________ shopping. They (buy) ___________

16 17
French perfume for gifts. Then they (sit) _____________ outside in the café
18
and (have) _____________ an expensive lunch. They (spend) _____________
19 20
a lot of money that day. Pete and Paula (think) ______________ Paris was a
21
romantic city.

12. Practice
Complete the life story of Jane Goofall. Write the correct from of the verb in the
parentheses. Use the simple present, the present progressive or the simple past.

Jane Good all was born in London, England, in 1934. As she (love)

____love___ stories about Africa. She (finish) ___________ school and

1 2
(work) ___________ for a film company. One day, a friend (invite) ______
3 4
___ her to Kenya, in Africa. She (save) ____________ money for the trip,
5

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 143
 and she(go) ____________ there. Jane (be) ______________ 23 years old.
6 7
In Kenya, she(meet) _____________ Louis Leakey. He (be) ________
8 9
a famous anthropologist ( a person who studies human and where they are

come from). Jane Goodall (become) ___________ his assistant. She

10
(travel)___________ Louis Leakey and his wife in America.
11
In 1960, she (begin) _____________ to study chimpanzees. She (live)
12
___________ alone in the forest in Africa. Every morning, she (go) _____
13 14
____ to the same place in the forest. The chimpanzees (see) ____________
15
her, but they (stand) ______________ far away. After about six months,
16
the chimpanzees (come) _____________ near her. Jane Godall (begin)
17
_____________ to know each chimpanzees. She (give) _______________
18 19
each chimpanzees a name. after years of work, she (discover) __________
20
many things about the chimpanzees. For example, chimpanzees (eat)

___________ meat.
21
Today, the number of chimpanzees is not so great. People (kill)

__________ the chimpanzees or (cut) __________ down the forest where

22 23
They live. Jane (study) ____________ chimpanzees for over 40 years. Now
24
she (travel) ______________ around the world and (talk) _____________
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 144
 25 26
about how to raise chimpanzees.

13. Practice
Use the simple present or simple past to complete the sentences about the storyuse
the verbs from the list.
become come hear talk
begin go live travel

1. Today, Jane Godall ___travels___ all over the world.

2. In her lectures she usually _____________ about how to save chimpanzees.
3. I ___________ her speak in New York last year.
4. Ms. Godall and a friend first ____________ to Kenya over 40 years ago.
5. In 1960, she ____________ to study chimpanzees in Africa.
6. She ________________ in the forest of Africa to study the chimpanzees.
7. After about six months, the chimpanzees ______________ near hear.
8. Jane Godall ________________ an expert on chimpanzees.

14. Your Turn

Tell your partner or your classmate about your life (or another person’s life). Use
regular or irregular verbs from the list or use your own.

arrive give pass my exams stay

be go play study
come have see visit
finish live start work
Example :
I was born in Cairo. My family lived in an apartment in the city.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 145
D. The Simple Pat Tense: Negative
Form: She didn’t have a dishwasher in 1940.

Subject Did Not Base Verb

I
You
He/She/It
did not Have a dishwasher
We
didn’t
You
They

We use the base verb of the verb with did not.

Correct: He did not walk.

Incorrect: He did not walked

15. Practice
Monica is nice to Paul, but he isn’t nice to her. Give the past tense of the verb
in the parentheses. Then complete the sentences with the negative form.
1. Monica (say) __said__ hello to Paul today, but he __didn’t say hello to her__ .
2. Monica (ask) ________ Paul “ How are you?”, but _______________ .
3. Monica (call) ________ Paul yesterday, but _____________________ .
4. Monica (write) _______ Paul a postcard, but ____________________ .
5. Monica ( give) _______ Paul a gift, but ________________________ .
6. Monica (go) _______ to see Paul, but _________________________ .
7. Monica (smile) _______ at Paul, but __________________________ .
8. Monica (wait) ________ for Paul last week, but _________________ .
9. Monica (kiss) _______ Paul last week, but _____________________ .

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 146
 10. Monica ( invite) _____ Paul to have lunch, but _________________ .

16. Your Turn

Say which of these activities you did or didn’t do yesterday.

Example:
I didn’t write a letter yesterday.
I made a phone call.

cook a meal play a sport visit a museum

go to the library reaps a paper walk for 20 minutes
listen to music speak English watch television
make a phone call take a shower write a letter

17. True or False Quiz

Work in groups or teams. Write and discuss six statements. Some should be true
and some should be not true. Then ask a person from the other team if the
statements are true or false. If a statement is false, the students must make the
statement negative.

Example:
Statement: Edison invented the telephone.
Answer: False. Edison didn’t invent the telephone.
Statement: It showed last January in this city.
Answer: True.

E. The Simple Past Tense: Yes/ No Questions

Form : Doris: Did you turn off the gas?
Albert: Yes, I did

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 147
 QUESTIONS SHORT ANWER
Did Subject Base Verb Affirmative Negative

Yes, No,

I you did you didn’t

You I/we did I/we didn’t

He he did He didn’t

She she did She didn’t

It it did It didn’t
Did Work yesterday?
We you did You didn’t

They they did They didn’t

18. Practice
Complete the dialogue by using the simple past tense of the words in the
parentheses.
Billy : (enjoy) __Did__ you __enjoy__ your vocation Dolores?
1 2
Dolores : No, ___ I didn’t__
3
Billy : Why not?

Dolores : Well, I (not, like) ________________ the food.

4
Billy : (like) ______________ you ______________ the city?
5 6
Dolores : No, ________________ .
7
Billy : What about the weather? (like) __________ you __________ ?
8 9
Dolores : No, _____________ . It (rain) ______________ every day.
10 11
Billy : (be) ___________ the hotel good?
12
Dolores : No, it _____________ . every time I (call) ___________ the
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 148
 13 14
reception desk, nobody (answer) ____________ .
15
Billy : (visit) ___________ you ___________ any museum?
16 17
Dolores : No, I ____________ . They (be) ____________ all closed. It
18 19
(be) ______________ a holiday
20
Billy : That’s terrible. (go) ____________ you ___________ shopping
21 22
at least?

Dolores : Yes, I ___________, but (not, buy) ____________ anything.

23 24
It (be) ______________ very expensive.
25
Billy : Well, (have) ____________ you _____________ a good flight?
26 27

Dolores : No, I _______________ . The flight (be) _____________ five

28 29
Hours lat, and the service (be) ____________ terrible.
30
Billy : So it (not, be) ________________ a good vocation, I guess.
31
Dolores : No, it (be) _______________ NOT!
32

19. Practice

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 149
 Julia , Ellen and Susan share an apartment. Julia left Ellen and Susan a list of
things to do. She is talking on the phone to Ellen now. Complete the dialogue
with simple past tense questions and affirmative and negative short answers.
Check eat pay wash
Do get take out water

Julia: Hello Ellen.

Ellen:Hi Julia
Julia: Did you and Susan do the things I wrote on the list?

Ellen:Well, we did some of them

Julia: Well, __did__ you ___check___ the mail yesterday?

1 2
Ellen:Yes, I _________, but I ____________ the bills. I forgot.
3 4
Julia: Uh-oh. ____________ you ___________ the food in the
5 6
refrigerator.

Ellen:No, I __________, but Susan ____________ . we didn’t have

7 8
have time to go to supermarket, so we just went to the small

grocery store on the corner, and we ____________ bread and

9
fresh milk.
Julia: __________ Susan ____________ the garbage?
10 11
Ellen:_______________, but she ______________ the plants.
12 13
Julia: ______________ she ______________ the dishes?
14 15
Ellen:_____________ .

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 150
 16
Julia: One more thing, ____________ you ___________ the laundry?
17 18
Ellen:______________ . I really didn’t have time.
19
Julia: That’s OK. Thanks Ellen. See you tomorrow!

20. Your Turn

Think of three questions to ask your partner about his/her last vocation/trip.
Your partner will give short answer to explain.

Example:
You: Did you stay in a hotel?
Your partner: No, I didn’t. I stayed in a guesthouse.

21. Guess the Famous Person Quiz

Work in groups. One person in the group thinks of a famous person from the
past. The others in the group ask 20 yes/no questions to guess who the person is.

Example:
Was this person a man? Yes. /No.
Did he/she live in the USA? Yes. /No.

F. The Simple Past Tense: Wh- Questions

Form: Brad: Where did you go on Sunday?
Dan: I went to the beach
Brad: What did you do?
Dan: I went surfing, of course.

Wh-Question Did Subject Word

Base Verb
What I Talk about?

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 151
 When You Go to the beach?
What time He Get there?
Where She Stay?

Who* Did You Call?

How We Know the place?
Why they Stay at the beach all day?

Wh- word as subject Past Tense Verb

What happened?

Who called?

*In formal written English, the wh- word would be whom.

III. SIMPLE FUTURE TENSE

A. The Future Tense: Be Going To
Form: Jamie is hungry
She’s going to eat the cookie.

AFFIRMATIVE STATEMENTS
Subject + Be Going To Base Verb
I am
You are
He/she/it is
going to eat.
We are
They are

NEGATIVE STATEMENTS
Subject + Be Not Going To Base Verb
I am
You are
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 152
 He/she/it is not going to eat.

We are
They are

YES/NO QUESTIONS SHORT ANWERS

Be + Subject Going To Base Affirmative Negative
Verb
Yes, No,
You are You aren’t
Am I
Are you I am I’m not
going to eat?
Is he/she/it He/she/it is He/she/it isn’t
Are we You are You aren’t
Are you We are We aren’t
Are they They are They aren’t

WH- QUESTIONS
Wh-Word Be Subject Going To Base Verb
What are You going to eat?
Where
When
Why
How
Who * are You going to See?

Note: We often pronounce going to as “gonna” when we speak.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 153
 *In formal written English, the wh- word would be whom.
Function: Look at those clouds!
It’s going to rain soon.
1. We use be + going to + base verb to make predictions about the future. (what
we see is going to happen very soon)
2. We use be+ going to+ base verb to talk about our plans for the future.
We’re going to buy a house next year.

1. Practice
Complete the dialogue with forms of be going to. Yuko is talking to Meg about her
trip to London next week.
Yuko : Guess what! I (go) __m’going to go to London next week!___
1
Meg : Lucky you! You (not/work) _______________________! How long
2
(stay) _____________ you _________________?
3 4
Yuko : I (stay) __________________ for five days. I (fly) _______________
5 6
on Sunday.

Meg : (stay) __________ you ____________ in a hotel in London?

7 8
Yuko : Yes, I ___________________. It’s expensive, but there are so many
9
things I want to see. On Monday, I (see) ______________________
10
St.Paul’s and then I (walk) ____________________ in the parks. On
11
Tuesday I (visit) ___________________ the Houses of Parliament. On
12

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 154
 Wednesday I (look) _____________________ at some museums. On
13
Thursday I (shop) ___________________ on Oxford street. I (buy)
14
_____________ some English tea.
15
Meg : I see you made plan for every day. (eat) ____________ you _______
16
______ fish and chips? English people eat fish and chips, you know.
17

Yuko : That’s one thing I (not/to) ____________________. I don’t like fish.

17
I (eat) __________________ Hamburgers as usual.
18
2. Practice
Your friend is going to have a party. Ask him/her questions about it. Use prompts
to make questions. Give your own answers.
1. When/you/have/party?
Questions: __When are you going to have the party________________ ?
Answer: __ On Saturday______________________________________
2. What kind of food /you/have?
Questions: _________________________________________________ ?
Answer: _________________________________________________
3. What/food/you make?
Question : _________________________________________________ ?
Answer: _________________________________________________
4. What/you/wear?
Question : _________________________________________________ ?
Answer: _________________________________________________
5. How many people/you/invite?
Question : _________________________________________________ ?

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 155
 Answer: _________________________________________________
6. Where/you/have the party?
Question : _________________________________________________ ?
Answer: _________________________________________________
7. What time/the party/ start?
Question : _________________________________________________ ?
Answer: _________________________________________________
8. What kind of music/you/have?
Question : _________________________________________________ ?
Answer: _________________________________________________
3. Practice
Say what you are going to do or are not going to do on the weekend.
Example :
Sleep late
I’m going to sleep late.
Write letters
I’m not going to write a letters.

1. watch television 5. phone your friends 9. go shopping

2. clean you room 6. cook a meat 10. go to see a movie
3. play a sport 7. meet a friend 11. do homework
4. do the laundry 8. work on a computer 12. visit a relative

B. Future Time Expression

Form: Jane is happy. She got a letter from Paul . he is going to come back next
Friday! That’s in eight days.

Next Tomorrow In Other expression

week morning ten minutes
month afternoon three hours soon

weekend evening four days tonight

Next tomorrow in
summer night five weeks the day after

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 156
 Friday six months tomorrow

two years a week from

today/ now
Function: We use future time expression at the beginning or at the end of the
sentence. We used a comma (,) after the time expression when it is at
the beginning of the sentence.

In eight days, Paul is going to come home.

Paul is going to come home in eight days.
4. Practice
Write about your life. Use time expression and be going to.
1. Next summer, _I’m going to visit my aunt in California________ .
2. In a couple of months, __________________________________ .
3. In two days, __________________________________________ .
4. A week from now, _____________________________________ .
5. Next Monday, ________________________________________ .
6. Tomorrow evening, ____________________________________ .
7. Tonight, _____________________________________________ .
8. Later today, __________________________________________ .
9. In a few minutes, ______________________________________ .

5. Practice
Complete the sentences. Use tomorrow, next, in, yesterday, last and ago.
1. Paul went to Los Angeles four months ___ago_____ .
2. He called Janine __________________ week from Los Angeles.
3. Janine got a letter from Paul two days ___________________ .
4. Paul is going to come home _________________ week.
5. He is going to be here ________________ one week.
6. Janine is going to buy a gift for Paul _______________ .
7. Paul didn’t call Janine ________________ .
8. Janine is going to be very happy _________________ Friday.
9. Paul and Janine are going to be married _________________ June

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 157
 10. They are going to be married _________________ three months.
11. They decided to get married six months _________________ .
12. They decided to get married ________________ October.

6. Practice
Work with a partner. Ask and answer questions with when are you going to ….?
or when did you…?
Example:
Have dinner
You: When are you going to have dinner?
Your Friend: I’m going to have dinner in two hours.
1. have dinner 4. call your friend 7. use a computer
2. go to the store 5. go home 8. come to class
3. do your homework 6. watch television

C. The Future Tense: The Present Progressive as a Future Tense

Form : John is meeting the director in 20 minutes.
He is seeing the director at 11:00 this morning.

Subject + Be Base Verb + ing

I’m
You’re
He’s
meeting the director in 20 minutes.
She’s
We’re
They’re
Note: See unit 4, page 91 for more information on the present progressive tense.
Function: Steve is leaving for New York in two hours.
He’s at the airport now.
1. We use the present progressive to talk about future plans. We often use a time
expression with the present progressive. We use the present progressive

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 158
 especially with the verbs of movement and transportation such as come, go, fly,
travel, and leave.
2. We can also use be going to for future plans.
Steve is going to leave for New York in two hours.
OR
Steve is leaving for New York in two hours.
3. We cannot use the present progressive for future predictions.
CORRECT: Look at those dark clouds! It’s going to rain soon.
INCORRECT: Look at those dark clouds! It’s raining soon

7. Practice
A. Jan is going to New York on a business trip. Look at her schedule. Write
about what she is doing on Monday. Use the present progressive of the verb in
the parentheses.
Monday
8:45 Arrive In New York . Take a taxi to the hotel.
9:30 Leave the hotel.
10:00 Meet Tim and Donna at the office.
10:00 -12:00 Work with Tim and Donna.
12:00 – 2:00 Have lunch with Tim, Donna, and the boss.
2:30 See Ted Cordel
4:00 Return to the office. Work with Donna.
6:00 Go back to the hotel.
7:00 Wait for Alex in the hotel lobby. Go for dinner.
10:00 Return to the hotel. Prepare for meeting on
Tuesday at 9:00.

1. (arrive) __At 8:45 she is arriving in New York_____________ .

2. (take) ___________________________________________ .
3. (leave) ___________________________________________ .
4. (meet) ___________________________________________ .
5. (work) ___________________________________________ .
6. (have) ___________________________________________ .
7. (see) ___________________________________________ .

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 159
 8. (return) ___________________________________________ .
9. (go back) ___________________________________________ .
10. (wait for) ___________________________________________ .
11. (go) ___________________________________________ .
12. (prepare) ___________________________________________ .

B. Work with a Partner write a questions and give answers.

1. What time/arrive/in New York?
What time is Jan arriving in New York_________________ ?
She is arriving in New York at 8:45____________________ ?
2. Who/meet/at 10:00?
________________________________________________ ?
________________________________________________ .
3. What/do/between 12:00 and 2:00?
________________________________________________ ?
________________________________________________ .
4. Where/wait/for Alex?
________________________________________________ ?
________________________________________________ .
5. What do/at 10:00?
________________________________________________ ?
________________________________________________ .

8. Practice
Complete the dialogue. Use the present progressive of the verbs in the parentheses.

Mike:What (do) _are__ you ___doing____ this weekend?

1 2
Jackie: Well, I’m really very busy. Tonight I (go) _____________ out to
3
Dinner with my friend Lulu. She’s great fun. We always have good
time. Then on Saturday morning I (take) _______________ a

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 160
 4
computer class
Mike: Finally! You’re learning to use a computer.
Jackie: Yes, I love it. I’m doing well, too. Then, after that, I (meet) ________
5
my mother. We (go) _______________ shopping to get my
6
father a birthday gift. Then, in the evening, I (have) _______________
7
dinner with Chris. On Sunday, Chris and I (go) _______________ to
8
a friend’s wedding. So on Sunday morning, I (get) _______________
9
dressed and he (pick) ______________ me up to go there. He (drive)
10
____________ there. It’s long drive. We (stay) _____________
11 12
there for the dinner reception then we (come) __________________
13
back at around six. Chris (fly) ____________ to Boston in the evening,
14
And I (go) ______________ over to Magda’s place to study English.
15
You know we (have) ______________________ a test on Monday. So
16
Anyway, Mike, what (do) __________ you _______________ ?
17 18
Mike : Oh, nothing really

Jackie: My bus is here. See you Monday! Bye!

9. Your Turn

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 161
 Work with a Partner ask and answers a questions.
Example:
You : where are you going after class?
Your partner : I’m going home.

Today Tomorrow On the weekend

Where/go/after class what/do/tomorrow where/go/Saturday
How/get/there where/go/evening what/do/Sunday
What/do/this evening

D. The Future Tense: Will

Form:one day people will go to the moon for vocations.

AFFIRMATIVE AND NEGATIVE WH- QUESTION

STATEMENTS
Subject Will (Not) Base Verb Wh- Word Will Subject Base Verb
What
I Where I do?
will
You When you stay?
will not go. Will
he/she/it Why he/she/it know?
won’t
We How we wait?
They How long they see?
Who*
*In formal written English, the wh- word would be whom

YES/NO QUESTIONS SHORT ANWER

Will Subject Main verb Affirmative Negative
Yes, No,
I you will. you won’t.
You I/we will. I/we won’t.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 162
 He he will. he won’t.
Will She go? she will. she won’t.
It it will. it won’t.
We you will. you won’t.
They they will. they won’t.
Note: Do not use contractions in affirmative short answer
CORRECT: Yes, they will
INCORRECT: Yes, they’ll
Function: Scientist will find a cure for cancer one day.

1. We use will for the future to make predictions about future (what we think will
happen)
Those shoes are very comfortable.
I’ll buy them.
2. We use will for the future when we decide to do something at the moment of
speaking.
3. We do not use will for the future when plans were made before this moment.
Angie: What are your plans for tomorrow?
Dick: We’re going to drive to Disneyland.
OR: We’re driving to Disneyland
NOT: We’ll drive to Disneyland.

10. Practice
Make predictions for the year 2050. Say what you think. Use will or won’t in the
blanks.
1. People __will___ drive electric cars.
2. Everybody _____________ have a computer at home
3. People _____________ carry money.
4. People _____________ take vocations on the moon.
5. All people _____________ speak the same language.
6. All people around the world _____________ use the same currency (money).
7. People _____________ find life on other planets.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 163
 8. People _____________ get serious disease like cancer.
9. Trains _____________ travel very fast.
10. People _____________ live to be 130 years old.
11. Men and women _____________ continue to marry.
12. Children _____________ go to school five days a week.

11. Practice
Complete the conversation with forms of the present progressive will, and, be
going to.
Julia : I (go) __ am going ____ to the supermarket right now. Do you want
1
Anything?

Leyla : Yes. Can you get some orange juice.

Julia : Sure. It’s on my list, so I (get) _________________ it.

2
Leyla : I also wanted to pick up my photo today, but I don’t have to me to do
it.

Julia : Don’t worry. I (pick) _________________ them up for you. I (be)

3
_____________ back soon. (be) __________ you ____________ here?
4 5 6
Leyla : I (go) ________________ to work now.
7
Julia : Ok. I (see) __________________ you later. Remember Tony and Suzy
8
(come) ____________________ tonight.
9

12. Practice

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 164
 Complete the telephone conversation between Steve and Dave with forms present
progressive will, and, be going to.
Steve: Hi Dave. (go) __are___ you ___ going__ to picnic on Saturday?
1 2
Dave : I don’t think I can. I (help) ___________________ Joanne move from
3
her apartment.
Steve: Oh no! I forgot she (move) ___________________ this weekend.
4
Dave : Well, (come) ________________ you ________________ to help?
5 6
Steve: Sure. What time (go) _____________ you _____________ to Joanne’s
7 8
apartment?

Dave : I don’t know right now. I (call) _________________ you tomorrow

9
night, and I (tell) ________________ you.
10
Steve: OK. Someone is knocking on the door right now. I (see) ___________
11
who it is. I (call) _________________ you right back. Bye
12
Dave : OK. Bye

13. Your Turn

Ask and answers the questions with a partner.

Example:
You: What will you do after this course?
Your Partner: I think I’ll take next level.

1. Where will you be at 6:00 tomorrow evening?

2. Where will you go on the weekend?
3. Where will you go for your next vocation?

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 165
 4. Where will you buy a car/ a new car?

E. May, Might, and Will

Form : Oh no! I’m late
I may miss my flight.

AFFIRMATIVE STATEMENTS NEGATIVE STATEMENTS

Subject May/Might Base Verb Subject May/Might Not Base Verb
I I
You You
He He
may not
She She
may go. might not go.
It It
might
We We
They They

Notes: Contractions for may or might are very rare.

We don’t use may or might in yes/no question.
Function:
1. We use may or might to talk something that is possible now or in the future.
I may/might go to Mexico next year.
You may/might have a problem with your computer.
May or might have the same meaning. They both express a possibility
2. We can also use may ( but not might) to give, refuse, or ask for permission.
May I use your phone?
You may use a dictionary during the test.
You may not go early.
3. We use will, be going to, or the present progressive when we are certain about
something. We use may or might when we are not certain.
I may be late. (It’s possible)
I’ll be late. (It’s certain)
I’m going to be late (It’s certain)

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 166
14. Practice
A friend is travelling around the world use will if you are certain. Use may or
might if you are not certain.

1. Friend: I’m going to Boston this winter.

You: Take warm clothes. It __will__ be cold. It’s always cold there in
winter.
2. Friend: I’m going to Los Angeles in this summer.
You: Take your shorts and light clothes. It _____________ be hot. It’s
always hot in the summer
3. Friend: I want to walk around New York at night.
You: Be careful. It ____________ dangerous. People sometimes get hurt.
4. Friend: in June, I’m going to Bangkok, in Thailand
You: Take an umbrella. It _________ be rainy. It always rain there in June.
5. Friend: I’m going to stay in Tokyo for a month.
You: Take a lot of money. It ______________ be expensive. Tokyo is
always expensive.
6. Friend: I’m flying from New York to Sydney, Australia.
You: It’s a long trip. Take a book with you. You __________ get bored.
7. Friend: I want to go to Rio de Janeiro for the carnival.
You: Make a hotel reservation. It ____________ be crowded. It’s always
crowded then.
8. Friend: I’m going to Africa to see wild animals.
You: Take some medicine with you. You ____________ get sick. People
sometimes get sick when they travel there.
15. Practice
Underline the correct verb.
1. I’m going/ might go to New York next week. I have my ticket already.
2. I may stay/’m staying at the Ambassador Hotel. I have a reservation for next
week.
3. I’ll go/may go to New Jersey or perhaps to Boston from New York.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 167
 4. I won’t spend/may not spend much time out of New York because my work
will keep me too busy.
5. I’ll finish/might finish my work in New York before Friday of next week. My
return flight is on that day.
6. I’ll see/might see a show on Broadway. I’m not sure.
7. It’s my birthday on Wednesday. I may celebrate/will celebrate it in New York.
8. I’ll go/may go to an expensive restaurant. I’m not sure.

16. Practice
Tell the class five things you may or might do when you leave school. Use these
idea or your own.

Example:
I might go to another country, for example, to China.

1. Go to another country.
2. Go to the university.
3. Get married,.
4. Get a job
5. Stay with your family.

F. Future Time Clauses with Before, After, and When

Form/Function: She’ll wear new suit when she goes to the interview.

1. A future time clause can begin with before, after, and when.
2. When a time clause refers to the future, the verb is in the simple present tense.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 168
 TIME CLAUSE MAIN CLAUSE
Simple present Future
Before I go to bed, I will do my homework
When she goes to the interview, she will wear her new suit
After we finish the test, we will go Home

CORRECT: Before I go to bed, I will do my homework.

INCORRECT: Before I will go to bed, I will do my homework.

1. We can put time clause before or after main clause. They both have the
same meaning.
She’ll wear new suit when she goes to the interview.
When she goes to the interview, she’ll wear her new suit.

2. When the time clause came first, put comma (,) after the time clause.

Note: see unit 6, page 141 for more information on time clauses.

17. Practice
Laura has an interview tomorrow. Underline the time clauses in the sentences
about her.
1. She’ll have breakfast before she goes to the interview.
2. Before she leaves home. She’ll take some important letters with her.
3. She’ll try and relax before she goes to the interview.
4. When she meets the interviewer, she’ll smile.
5. When the interviewer asks questions, she’ll answer all of them.
6. After the interview, she’ll call her mother.
7. She’ll meet her friend after the interview.
8. When they meet, they’ll talk about the interview.
9. She’ll be worried before she gets the news about her job.
10. When she gets the job, she’ll celebrate.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 169
18. Practice
Jim and Paula Newley are planning a trip to Istanbul, Turkey. Complete the
sentences with the words on the parentheses.
1. We (change) __will change__ some money before we leave.
2. We (make) ______________ a list of all the interesting places before we leave.
3. When we (get) ____________ there, we’ll stay at the Hilton hotel.
4. After we see the city, we (visit) __________ the museums.
5. When we stay in Istanbul, we (not, go) ___________ to other cities.
6. We won’t have time to see everything before we (leave) _________.
7. We’ll go to the bazaar after we (visit) __________ .
8. When we go to the bazaar, we (buy) __________ a rug.
9. When we walk around the bazaar, we (take) ____________ photos.
10. When we (stay) ___________ in Istanbul we won’t need a car.
11. We’ll take a taxi when we (want) __________ to go somewhere.
12. Before we leave Istanbul, we (get) ____________ lots of souvenir.
19. Your Turn
Work with partner. Ask and answer the questions.
Example:
You: What are you doing today before you take the test.
Your Partner: I’m going to get a good night’s sleep before I take the test.
1. What are you going to do before you eat dinner?
2. What are you going to do after you eat dinner?
3. What are you going to eat when you have dinner?

G. Future Conditional Sentences

Form:If the weather is nice tomorrow, we’ll go fishing.
1. A conditional sentence has a main clause and a dependent clause that start with
if. We call this kind of dependent clause an if clause.
2. In future conditional sentences, we use the simple present in an if clause to
express future time. We use a future tense in the main clause.

IF CLAUSE MAIN CLAUSE

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 170
 Present Future
If I have time I will see you.
If you don’t hurry You will be late.
If she gets the job She is going to buy a car.
If it is sunny We will go fishing.
If we leave now We will get there in time.
If they don’t go today They will miss it.

3. An if clause can come before or after the main clause. The meaning is the
same.
If the weather is nice tomorrow, we’ll go fishing.
We’ll go fishing if the weather is nice tomorrow.
CORRECT: If I have time tomorrow, I will visit you.
INCORRECT: If I will have time tomorrow, I will visit you.

4. When the if clause comes first, we put a comma (,) after it.

Function:
We use future conditional sentence to say that one situation in the future depends
on another situation.

If I have time tomorrow, I will visit you. ( I may or may not have time, so I
may or may not visit you.)
If she sees Tony, she’ll invite him to the party.

20. Practice
Tim is going to be away from home. His mother is worried about him. Match the
sentence parts. Then write sentences below.
A B
___ 1. Go out without a coat a. be hungry
___ 2. Lie in the sun b. not pass your exam
___ 3. Don’t eat breakfast c. catch a cold

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 171
 ___ 4. Eat too many French fries d. call home
___ 5. Don’t study hard e. not tired the next day
___ 6. Get lonely f. get sunburned
___ 7. Go to bed early g. see a doctor
___ 8. Get sick h. get fat.

1. If you go out without a coat you will catch a cold__________ .

2. ________________________________________________ .
3. ________________________________________________ .
4. ________________________________________________ .
5. ________________________________________________ .
6. ________________________________________________ .
7. ________________________________________________ .
8. ________________________________________________ .

21. Practice
Complete the sentences with the correct future tense form of the verb in
parentheses. Sometimes two answer are possible

1. What are we doing this Saturday? Well, if the water is nice we (go)
___will go/are going to go_______ to the park.
2. If it (rain) ____________________________, we’ll stay home.
3. If we stay home, we (watch) _____________________ television.
4. We (watch) ________________________a video if there’s nothing good on
television.
5. I ( not, cook) ______________________________ if we stay home.
6. I (order) ______________________________ a pizza if we eat at home.
7. If the pizza is expensive, Tony (make) __________________________ pasta.
8. He (cook) _________________________ pasta if there is no food.
9. If Tony cooks, he (cook) ___________________________ pasta, he only
knows how to cook Pasta.
10. If we go to the park, we (play) ________________________ baseball.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 172
 11. If we (get) _____________________________, tired we
_____________________________(sit) on the grass.
12. If we (go) ___________________________________ to the park, we (have)
_____________________________ a picnic.
13. I (go) ________________________________ to the store to get some things if
we (have) ____________________________ a picnic.
14. If the weather (be) ____________________________________ hot, we (take)
_____________________ the ice box.
15. If we (go) ________________________ to the park, we (not, drive)
___________________________ . we’ll walk.
16. We (have) ______________________________________ a good time if we
(go) ______________________________ to the park.

22. Your Turn

Work with a partner or a group. Ask and answer the questions.

Example:
You: What are you going to do if it rains tonight.
Your partner: If it rains tonight, I’m going to stay home and watch television.
1. What will you do if the weather is nice in the weekend?
2. What will you do if the weather is cold
3. What will you do if the there is no class tomorrow.
4. What are you going to do if you do not have homework tonight.

H. The Simple Present Tense with Time Clauses and If Clauses

Form: When you get thirsty, you drink the water.
We sometimes use the simple present in the dependent clause ( the if clause or the
time clause) and also in the main clause.

Time clause/ If Clause Main Clause

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 173
 Before the teacher walks into the classroom, the students make a lot of noise.
After I get up, I usually have a cup of tea.
When you get thirsty, You drink water.
if you water plants, They grow.

CHAPTER 4

SIMPLE CONTINUOUS TENSE

A. The Present Progressive Tense: affirmative Statement

Form: A: That girl is looking at me!

B: Which one?

A: She is wearing a hat, and she is drinking a soda.

We form the present progressive (also called the present continuous) with present
of the verb to be and base verb + ing

Subject Be Base verb+ -ing

I am

You are
He is
She
working.
It

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 174
 We are
You
They

Function: We use the present progressive to talk about what is happening now.
The students are studying in the library.
They are reading.
It is snowing right now.
The woman is smiling
23. Practice
It’s Sunday. You are looking out of the window. Complete the sentences with the
present progressive tense of the verb in the parentheses.
1. The birds ___ are singing ____ (sing).rd.
2. Tony ______________ (work) in the yard.
3. Fred and Tom _______________ (talk) in the street.
4. A child _______________ (eat) ice cream.
5. Children __________________ (play) in the park.
6. Bob ____________________ (was) his car.
7. A woman ____________________ (walk) in the street.
8. A cat ____________________ (sleep) in a tree.
9. Maria ____________________ (clean) the windows.
10. Bob and Linda ____________________ (go) to the car.
11. Alex ____________________ (fix) his motorcycle.
12. Jo ____________________ (do) his homework.
13. Carol ____________________ (read) the newspaper.
14. A man ____________________ (wait) for the bus.
15. A boy ____________________(stand) by a tree.
16. He ____________________(drink) soda.
17. Two girls ____________________ (watch) the boy.
18. The girls ____________________(wear) jeans.
19. The girls ____________________ (walk).
20. An airplane ____________________ (fly) in the sky.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 175
 Verbs
carry stand wear

1. He _He’s wearing a shirt_________________________________ .

2. She __________________________________________________ .
3. She ___________________________________________________ .
4. She ____________________________________________________ .
5. He ____________________________________________________ .
6. He ____________________________________________________ .
7. She ____________________________________________________ .
8. He ____________________________________________________ .
9. He ____________________________________________________ .
10. They ____________________________________________________ .

24. Practice
Work with a partner or the class. Describe what a student in your class is
wearing. Do not say the name of the student. Do not say he or she. Say “ the
student.” Can your partner or the class guess who it is?

Example:
You: The student is wearing black shoes.
Your partner: Is it Kang.
You: No, it isn’t. the person is wearing sweater.

B. The Spelling of Verbs Ending in –ing

Form: The sun is shining.
The woman is sitting on the chair by the beach.
She is typing on her laptop.

Verb Ending Rule Examples

1. Consonant + e. Drop the e, add –ing. Dance dancing

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 176
 Come coming
2. One vowel + Double the consonant, add Sit sitting
consonant. –ing

Exception: verbs Do not double w, x, y. Show showing

that end in w, x, y. Fix fixing
Say saying
3. Two vowels + Do double the consonant, Eat eating
one consonant. add –ing Sleep sleeping

4. All other verbs Add –ing Talk talking

Read reading

Vowels: a, e, i, o, u
Consonant: b, c, d, f, g, h, j, k, l, m, n, p, q, r, s, t, v, w, x, y, z.

25. Practice
Write the base form of each verb.
1. saving ___save____ 11. raining ___________
2. making ___________ 12. smiling ___________
3. typing ___________ 13. hurrying ___________
4. writing ___________ 14. kissing ___________
5. studying ___________ 15. riding ___________
6. relaxing ___________ 16. driving ___________
7. hoping ___________ 17. agreeing ___________
8. planning ___________ 18. giving ___________
9. adding ___________ 19. swimming ___________
10. trying ___________ 20. standing ___________

26. Practice
Use the rules for adding –ing to the verbs on the list. Then write them in the
Correct column.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 177
 cry mix read stop
dance move run take
fix play save wash
get put smile wear
hope rain stay yawn

Add –ing Drop e, add –ing double the

consonant, add –ing
_____washing_______ ______saving______ _____getting________
___________________ _________________ __________________
____________________ _________________ __________________
___________________ _________________ __________________
___________________ _________________ __________________
___________________ _________________ __________________
___________________ _________________ __________________

27. Practice
Fill in the blank with the present progressive of the verb in the parentheses. Use
the correct spelling.

Dear Elsie,
It’s Monday evening and it (rain) ____is raining_________ outside. I (sit)
1
________________ at my desk in my room. I (watch) _________________
2 3
the rain from my window, and I (think) __________________ of you. All
4
the family is at home this evening. My father (read) __________________
5
a book and (eat) _______________ popcorn. My brother (play) ________
6 7
______ video games in his room. My mother is in the kitchen. She (make)

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 178
 _________________ a cake because it’s my sister’s birthday tomorrow. Right
8
now my sister in her room. She (do) _________________ her homework,
9
and she (listen to) ________________ music at the same time. The telephone
10
(ring), _________________ and my mother (call) __________________
11 12
me. I must go now.

Write soon,

Magda

28. Practice
Write eight sentences about what is happening in your class right now. Use the
verbs in the list or use your own.

Listen read stand wear

Look at sit talk to write

1. The teacher is standing in front of the class_______________ .

2. _________________________________________________ .
3. _________________________________________________ .
4. _________________________________________________ .
5. _________________________________________________ .
6. _________________________________________________ .
7. _________________________________________________ .
8. _________________________________________________ .

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 179
C. The Present Progressive Tense: Negative Statement
Form: The man is not sleeping.

He’s not sleeping.

OR
He isn’t sleeping.
To form the negative of the present progressive tense, we use not after the verb be
and the verb + ing. There are two forms of contractions. Both forms of
contractions are correct.
Are not = ‘re not OR aren’t
Is not = ‘s not OR isn’t

Subject Be Not Base Verb + -ing Contraction

I am I’m not*
You are You’re/aren’t
He is He’s not/isn’t
She She’s not/isn’t
It It’s not/isn’t
not working.
We are We’re/aren’t
They They’re/aren’t
*There is no contraction for am not

D. The Present Progressive Tense: Yes/No Questions

Form: A: Is the woman riding her bicycle?
B: No, she isn’t.
A: Is she standing next to her bicycle.
B: Yes, She is.

YES/NO QUESTION SHORT ANSWER

Be Subject Base Verb + -ing Affirmative Negative
Yes, No,

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 180
 Am I you are you’re not/aren’ t.
Are You I am I’m not.
He he is he’s not/isn’t.
Is She she is she’s not/isn’t.
working now?
It it is it’s not/isn’t.
We you are you’re not/ aren’t.
Are You we are we’re not/ aren’t.
They They are they’re not/ aren’t.

29. Practice
Match the question with the answers.
_d__ 1. Is your sister studying? a. No, you’re not. That seat is free.
____ 2. Is the sun is shining? b. Yes, they’re. They’re in their beds.
____ 3. Am I taking your seat? c. Yes, he is. He is making rice.
____ 4. Are you studying? d. No, she isn’t. She is watching
television.
____ 5. Is David cooking? e. yes, we are. We’re learning grammar.
____ 6. Are the children sleeping? f. No. it’s not. It’s cloudy.

30. Your Turn

Work with a partner or the class. Take the role of a person in one of the photos
in this unit. Your partners or the class ask you yes/o questions to find out which
person you are.

Example:
You: Are you getting married
Your partner: No, I’m not.
You: Are you standing next to bicycle?
Your partner: Yes, I am.

E. The Present Progressive Tense: Wh- Questions

Form:A: What is the man doing?
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 181
 B: He’s talking on the phone and walking.
A: Where is he walking?
B: He’s walking down the street.

Wh- word Be Subject Base Verb + -ing

Where is Tony working?
What are you eating?
Why Is Susan studying?
When are they coming?
Who* Is Ken talking to?
How are you feeling?
* In formal written English, the wh- word would be whom.

31. Practice
Write a question for each sentence. Use the wh- question words in parentheses.

1. She’s watching a movie. (what)

What is she watching_____________________________________ ?
2. I am drinking tea. (what)
_______________________________________________________ ?
3. He is going to the store (where)
_______________________________________________________ ?
4. Sandra is coming at six. (when)
_______________________________________________________ ?
5. I am taking an umbrella because it is raining.(how)
_______________________________________________________ ?
6. Peter is talking to his father. (who)
_______________________________________________________ ?
7. Linda is feeling fine.(how)
_______________________________________________________ ?
8. The children are playing in the park. (where)
_______________________________________________________ ?

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 182
 9. She is going to the bank this afternoon. (when)
_______________________________________________________ ?
10. I am talking to Bill on the telephone. (who)
_______________________________________________________ ?

F. Verbs Not Used in the Present Progressive Tense

Function: I love Paris. I think Paris is beautiful.
1. Some verbs are not usually used in the present progressive tense. These are
called non action verbs. They describe a state or condition, not an action. We
use the simple present with these verbs.

Non-action Verbs
believe know prefer taste
hate like remember think
have Love see understand
hear need smell want

CORRECT: I know the answer.

INCORRECT: I am knowing the answer

CORRECT: Do you hear the music?

INCORRECT: Are you hearing the music?

2. The verbs think and have are sometimes used in the present progressive tense.

He thinks it is difficult (“ think” here means “ believe”)

He is thinking about his family. (“ Think” here means “ thoughts are
going through the person’s mind”)

Julia has a car. (“ Has” here means “possess.”)

We are having a good time. ( In certain idiomatic expression, such as
have a good/bad time and have a problem/difficulty, have can be
used in the progressive tenses).
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 183
32. Practice
Look at the following pairs. Only one sentence is possible. Check the correct
sentence.
1. ______ a. Mary is having a lot of work right now.
______ b. Mary has a lot of work right now.
2. ______ a. Susan needs a new coat.
______ b. Susan is needing a new coat.
3. ______ a. Look! That man takes a photo of us.
______ b. Look! That man is taking a photo of us.
4. ______ a. Please be quiet. I study.
______ b. Please be quiet. I am studying.
5. ______ a. This cup of coffee is smelling good.
______ b. This cup of coffee smells good
6. ______ a. I look for a new apartment.
______ b. I’m looking for a new apartment.
7. ______ a. The children are loving ice cream.
______ b. The children love ice cream
8. ______ a. He’s not understanding Japanese.
______ b He doesn’t understand Japanese.

33. Practice
Complete the dialogue with the simple present tense or present progressive of the
verb in the parentheses.
Maria: Where (go) _are__ you __going__ ?
1 2
Tony: I (go) ______________ to the store.
3

Maria: But it (rain) ________________ outside.

4
Tony: I (know) _______________ . I (love) _______________ the rain.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 184
 5 6
(want) _____________ you _____________ anything from the store.
7 8
Maria: yes, (I need) _________________ a notepad for my homework.
9
Tony: O.K. What color? White or yellow?

Maria: I (prefer) ______________ white. Thanks, Tony.

10
34. Your Turn
What three things do you hear right now?
What three things do you see right now?
What three things do you have right now?
Example:
I hear the radio, the traffic outside, and dog barking.

G. The Simple Present Tense and the Present Progressive Tense.

Form: Sally is stretching right now.
Sally stretches everyday.

The Simple Present The Present Progressive

Statements Statements
Use the simple present for actions you Use the simple present progressive for an
do all the time or again and again. action happening right now.

I watch television every evening. I am watching television right now.

He studies grammar every . He’s studying grammar at the
moment
Questions Questions
Use do and does plus the base verb. Use am, is, or, are, plus the –ing verb.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 185
 Do you watch television every day? Are you watching television right now?
Does he study grammar every day? Is he studying grammar at the moment?
Negatives Negatives
Use do and does plus not and the base Use am, is, or, are, plus not and the –ing
verb. verb.

I don’t watch television every day. I’m not watching television right
He doesn’t study grammar every day. now.
He isn’t studying grammar at the
moment.

Function:

The Simple Present The Present Progressive

We use the simple present to talk about We use the present progressive to talk
things that people do all the time or about things that are happening right
again and again. now.
I run three times a week. She’s running now.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 186
 CHAPTER 5
MODAL VERB
I. MODAL VERB (1)
A. Can
Form: Bears can climb trees.
Bears can’t fly.
AFFIRMATIVE AND NEGATIVE STATEMENTS
Subject Can Base
Verb
I ski
You swim.
can speak French.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 187
 He / She / It cannot cook rice.
can’t drive a car.
We climb trees.
They sleep.

Function:
We use can to talk about ability in the present.
I come from Italy. I can speak Italian, but I can’t speak Japanese.
Yuko comes from Japan. She can’t speak Italian, but she can speak Japanese.
Ted can play the piano, but he can’t play the guitar.
1. Practice
A. What do you know about animals? Look at the chart and write seven affirmative
sentences and seven negative sentences about the animals.

Animal Verb
Elephants fly.
Birds swim.
Chickens make honey.
Bees can can’t climb trees.
Horses sing.
Penguins run.
Monkeys see at night.
Dogs lie down.

Affirmative Sentence
1. Elephant can swim____________________________ .
2. ____________________________________________ .
3. ____________________________________________ .
4. ____________________________________________ .
5. ____________________________________________ .
6. ____________________________________________ .
7. ____________________________________________ .

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 188
 8. ____________________________________________ .

Negative Sentence.
1. Elephant can’t fly ____________________________ .
2. ____________________________________________ .
3. ____________________________________________ .
4. ____________________________________________ .
5. ____________________________________________ .
6. ____________________________________________ .
7. ____________________________________________ .
8. ____________________________________________ .

B. Discuss these questions with a partner

1. What are some animals and the special things they do?
Example:
Whales can stay under water for a long time.

2. What can humans do that animals can’t?

Example:
You: Humans can build things. Animals can’t.
Your partner: Well, some animals can build things. For example, birds can
make nests.
2. Practice
Make sentences about yourself with I can or I can’t.
Example:
Write with my left hand
You: I can write with my left hand. OR I can’t write with my left hand
1. write with both hands
I can’t write with both hands .
2. eat with chopsticks
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 189
 ___________________________________________________.
3. see without glasses
___________________________________________________.
4. drink tea without sugar
___________________________________________________.
5. stand on my head
___________________________________________________.
6. type fast
___________________________________________________.
7. cook pasta
___________________________________________________.
8. ride a bicycle
___________________________________________________.
9. run three miles
___________________________________________________.
10. play basketball
___________________________________________________.
11. Sing
___________________________________________________.
12. Dance
___________________________________________________.
13. paint pictures
___________________________________________________.
14. sew on a button
.

B. Questions with Can

Form:
YES/NO QUESTIONS ANSWERS
Can Subject Base Verb
You speak English? Yes, I/we can.
Can We dance the tango? No, he can’t.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 190
 He go outside? Yes, you can.
They see us? No, they can’t.

WH- WORD QUESTIONS

Wh- Word Can Subject Base Verb
Where I buy this book?
When can You come?
What She do?

3. Practice
A. Read this advertisement.
DAY CARE PROVIDER needed for 2
children 4 and 7 years old.
Requirements: Drive, cook meals, tell
stories, read music, swim, draw, and have
a lot of energy. Excellent pay. Please call
Monica 743-8995.

B. Monica is talking to a job applicant. Complete her questions with can or other
question forms.
1. How old are you?
2. ___________________ drive?
3. ___________________ meals?
4. ___________________ music?
5. ___________________ swim?
6. ___________________ draw?
7. ___________________ stories?
8. ___________________ a lot of energy?
9. What other things ___________________ do?
10. When ___________________ come?

C. How write your answers to Monica’s questions.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 191
 1. _I am 18 years old________________________________.
2. ________________________________________________.
3. ________________________________________________.
4. ________________________________________________.
5. ________________________________________________.
6. ________________________________________________.
7. ________________________________________________.
8. ________________________________________________.
9. ________________________________________________.
10. ________________________________________________.

4. Practice
A. Work with a partner. Ask questions and give short answers.
Example:
Use a computer
You: Can you use a computer?
Your partner: Yes, I can. OR No, I can’t.

1. use a computer 7. cook

2. ski 8. draw or paint
3. play a musical instrument 9. what kind of food/cook
4. ride a horse/a bicycle/a motorcycle 10. what sports/play
5. drive a car 11.howmany languages/speak
6. play chess 12. what/do/well

B. Now tell the class what you and your partner can and can’t do.
Example:
I can ride a bicycle, speak three languages, and cook eggs and rice.
I can’t ski or play chess.
My partner can use a computer.

C. Could: Past of Can

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 192
 Form: After the accident last week, he couldn’t see, and he couldn’t run.
He could talk.
AFFIRMATIVE AND NEGATIVE STATEMENTS
Subject Could (Not) Base Verb
I come to class
yesterday.
You could do the
couldn’t homework.
He / She
could not
find the store.
We
go to the
They concert.

YES/NO QUESTIONS SHORT

Could Subject Base Verb ANSWERS
I Run fast? Yes, you
could.
Could You Ride a bicycle? Yes, I/we
could.
she/he Finish the test? No, she
couldn’t.
We Eat the food? No, you
couldn’t.
They Play tennis? Yes, they
could.

Function: Could is the past form of can. We use could or could not (couldn’t) for ability
in the past.
I could ride a bicycle when I was five.
I couldn’t read.
Could you read when you were five?

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 193
5. Practice
Mary is twenty-five years old now. What can she do now but couldn’t do when she
was two years old? Write sentences with the words and phrases below.
A.
1. ride a bicycle
She couldn’t ride a bicycle .
2. run fast

3. drive a car

4. ski

5. take tests

6. work

7. dance

B. Write three things you couldn’t do before but you can do now.
1. Five years ago, I couldn’t swim, but I can swim well now
2. .
3.

6. Practice
Andy was at home last month with a broken leg. What could he do? What couldn’t
he do? Write sentences about Andy using words from the list.
drive play tennis swim watch TV
go to school read magazines visit friends work online
1. _He couldn’t go to school__________________________ .
2. _______________________________________________ .
3. _______________________________________________ .
4. _______________________________________________ .
5. _______________________________________________ .
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 194
 6. _______________________________________________ .
7. _______________________________________________ .
8. _______________________________________________ .

7. Practice
Work with a partner. Ask what your partner could do when he or she was six years
old.

Example:
Play the piano
You: Could you play the piano?
Your partner: Yes, I could. OR No, I couldn’t.

1. read 9. tell the time

2. swim 10. take photographs
3. paint picture 11. sing
4. write 12. ride a horse
5. use a computer 13. climb trees
6. use the telephone 14. make a sandwich
7. count to a hundred 15. brush your teeth
8. ride a bicycle 16. eat with chopsticks

D. Be Able To
Form: Hercules Lewis is very strong. He is able to lift three people at the
same time.

PRESENT PAST
Subjec Form Able Base Subject Form of Able Base
t of Be To Verb Be To Verb
I am I was
You are You were
He He

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 195
 She is able to go. She was able go.
It It to
We are We were
They They

FUTURE
Subject Form of Be Able To Base Verb
I
You
He
will be able to go.
She
It
We
They

Function: We can use be able to in place of can or could for ability in the
present, future, and past.
Past
He wasn’t able to finish the test yesterday. OR He couldn’t finish the test
yesterday.
Present
She is able to run five miles. OR She can run five miles.*
Future
I’ll be able to go out tomorrow. OR I can go out tomorrow.
*Can is more common than be able to in the present tense.

8. Practice: Read
Read about Mozart. Change the underlined forms of can/could to forms of be able to.

Mozart was born in Austria in 1756. His father was a musician. At

age three, he could play the piano. After he heard a piece of music one
time, Mozart could play it. People couldn’t believe their ears! At age
Grammarfive,
1 he could write music for the piano. Soon his father couldn’t teach
Englishhim because little Mozart knew everything. At twelve, he was famous
Department
and could make money for his family. Page 196
Mozart worked long hours and could work very fast. He could
write an opera in just a few weeks. He could work better at night
because it was quiet. He could write all kinds of music, even music for
 1. __was able to play________ 7. __________________________
2. _______________________ 8. __________________________
3. _______________________ 9. __________________________
4. _______________________ 10. __________________________
5. _______________________ 11. __________________________
6. _______________________ 12. __________________________

9. Practice
A.
This is Tommy. He is nine years old now.
Complete the sentences to say what he can do now, what he could do when he was a
baby and what he will be able to do when he is 16.

Baby Now (age 9) Age 16

Smile use a computer dance
sleep ride a bicycle drive a car
cry play football sing in a group
eat run get a part-time job

1. When he was a baby, he could smile____________________.

2. Now, he can use a computer__________________________ .
3. When he is 16, he will be able to dance_________________ .
4. When he was a baby, ________________________________.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 197
 5. Now,_____________________________________________.
6. When he is 16, _____________________________________
7. When he was a baby, ______________________________
8. Now, ____________________________________________.
9. When he is 16, _____________________________________
10. When he was a baby, ______________________________
11. Now, ____________________________________________.
12. When he is 16, _____________________________________

B. Say three things you will be able to do in the future.

Example:
I will be able to talk to people on the telephone in English.

E. Should
Form: In China and Japan you should bow when you greet someone.

AFFIRMATIVE AND NEGATIVE STATEMENTS

Subject Should Base Verb
I
You should
should not go.
He / She / It
shouldn’t
We
They

YES/NO QUESTIONS SHORT

Should Subject Base Verb ANSWERS
I Yes, you should.
You No, I/we should.
go?
She/he/it Yes, she should.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 198
 Should
We No, you
shouldn’t.
They Yes, they should.

Function:
1. We use should to give advice. Should means it’s a good idea to do something.
Dick is very sick. He should see a doctor.
Nancy is still working at 3:00 in the morning. She should go to bed.

2. We use shouldn’t (should not) when it’s a bad idea to do something.

You shouldn’t drive in the storm. It’s dangerous.
You shouldn’t eat the whole cake. He’ll get sick.
10. Practice
Jim is going to Asia. Give him advice. Complete the sentences with should or
shouldn’t.
1. You shouldn’t speak fast. Your audience may not understand you.
2. If you don’t know what to do, you ask someone.
3. You blow your nose in front of other people at a meeting.
4. You be on time for class.
5. You greet older people first.
6. You use your hands too much when you speak. A hand sign may
have a different meaning there.

11. Practice
Nick is a teenager. Tell what Nick should or shouldn’t do.
1. He skips school.
_He shouldn’t skip school____________________________________ .
2. He comes home late.
_________________________________________________________ .
3. He doesn’t do his homework.
_________________________________________________________

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 199
 4. He doesn’t listen to his parents
_________________________________________________________
5. He doesn’t listen in class.
_________________________________________________________
6. He doesn’t clean up his room.
_________________________________________________________
7. He doesn’t clean up his room.
_________________________________________________________
8. He asks for money from his parents every day.
_________________________________________________________
9. He’s not nice to his brother and sister.
_________________________________________________________
10. He doesn’t help with the housework
_________________________________________________________

12. Practice
Give advice in these situations.

1. Ted has a very bad cold and he is at work.

He should go to bed

2. Alex has a test tomorrow, but he hasn’t studied for it. He wants to watch television
right now.

3. Tim often goes to bed late, and gets up late. He’s often late for work.

4. When it’s cold outside, Joe wears a T-shirt.

5. The coffee in the restaurant is cold. You cannot see the waiter.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 200
 6. Ken is making a salad. He has not washed his hands, and he hasn’t washed the
vegetables for the salad.

7. Ken is overweight and has health problems because of his weight. He drives
everywhere. He even drives to the corner store to get his cigarettes.

F. Must
Form: You mustn’t talk in class.

AFFIRMATIVE AND NEGATIVE STATEMENTS

Subject Must (Not) Base Verb
I
You must
must not stop at the red light.
He / She / It
mustn’t
We
They

Note: questions with must are formal and not very common. They are formed like
questions with can and should.
What must I do?

Function:
1. We use must to say that something is very important or necessary. We often use must
for rules o strong advice. We use must not (mustn’t) when something is against the
law or rules or isn’t right.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 201
 I must go to the bank. I have no more money. (It’s a necessity; there is no other
choice.)
You mustn’t park here. (It is against the law rules.)

2. Must is stronger than should. When we use must, we have no choice. When we use
should, we have a choice.
I should go to the bank. (It’s a good idea, but not necessary.)
You shouldn’t park here. (It’s not a good idea, but you can if you want.)

13.Practice
Complete the following class rules with must or mustn’t.
1. You must be quiet when someone else is speaking.
2. listen to the teacher.
3. arrive in class on time.
4. eat in class.
5. use a telephone in class.
6. answer the teacher’s questions.
7. go to sleep.
8. attend the class every day.
9. bring your books to class.
10. do homework.
11. cheat or copy in a test.
12. write letters to friends in class.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 202
14. Practice
Hotel Iron Sides is the only hotel in a small town. The hotel has many strict rules.
Change the rules to sentences with must or mustn’t.
Hotel Rules

Do not smoke in your room.

Do not take food into your room.
Pay for your room on the day you arrive.
No credit cards or checks are accepted.
Do not wash clothes in your room.
Do not bring visitors to your room.
Return to the hotel by 10:00 P.M. every night.
Turn off the television after 10:00 P.M.
Leave your key at the reception desk when you go out.
Ask the reception desk if you want to use the telephone.
Leave your room at 9:00 A.M. on the day you leave.

1. You mustn’t smoke in your room.

2. take food into your room.
3. pay for your room on the day you arrive.
4. pay with cash.
5. wash clothes in your room.
6. bring visitors to your room.
7. return to the hotel by 10:00 p.m. every night.
8. turn off the television after 10:00 p.m. at
night.
9. leave your key at the reception desk when
you go out.
10. ask the reception desk if you want to use the
telephone.
11. leave your room at 9:00 a.m. on the day you
leave.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 203
15. Practice
Work with a partner. With sentences using must and mustn’t for the following
situations.

1. When you are in library

When you are in a library, you must be quiet.
When you are in a library, you mustn’t eat.
2. when you are on an airplane

3. before you leave the country

4. when you take a test

5. when you drive

6. when you eat at a restaurant

7. when you are shopping online

8. when you are at a concert

G. Have To
Form: Bill has to get up at 5:00 A.M. to work in the garden.
Ken doesn’t have to get up at 5:00 A.M.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 204
 But he has to wear a suit to work.
PRESENT
AFFIRMATIVE NEGATIVE STATEMENTS
STATEMENTS
Subject Have To Base Subject Do/Does Have Base
Verb Not To Verb
I have to I do not
You You don’t
He He
work. have to work.
She has to She does not
It It doesn’t
We have to We do not
They They don’t

YES/NO QUESTIONS SHORT ANSWERS

Do/Does Subject Have To Base Verb
Do I Yes, you do.
You No, I/we don’t.
have to work?
Does he/she/it Yes, he/she/it does.
Do We Yes, you do.
They No, they don’t.

PAST
AFFIRMATIVE NEGATIVE STATEMENTS
STATEMENTS

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 205
 Subject Had To Base Subject Do/Does Have Base
Verb Not To Verb
I I
You You
He He
had to work. did not have to work.
She She
don’t
It It
We We
They They

YES/NO QUESTIONS SHORT

Did Subject Have To Base Verb ANSWERS
I Yes, you did.
You No, I/we didn’t.
Did have to work?
He/she/it No, she didn’t.
We Yes, you did.
They No, they didn’t.

Function:
1. We use have to for something that is necessary. But have to is not as strong as must.
Have to means the same as need to:
We have to study for the test.
OR We need to study for the test.

Joe has to wear a suit for his new job.

OR Joe needs to wear a suit for his new job
2. We use don’t have to and didn’t have to for the negative. Don’t/doesn’t/didn’t have
to means that something is not or was not necessary. There is a choice.
Tomorrow is Saturday. We don’t have to study tonight.
Tim didn’t have to wait at the airport yesterday.
3. We use do/does…have to…? And did…have to…? to ask if something is necessary.
Do we have to go to school tomorrow? Yes, you do.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 206
 Did you have to work late yesterday? No, I didn’t.

16. Practice
What do you have to do in your English class? Make sentences with have to or don’t
have to.
1. _ We have to______ learn grammar rules.
2. ________________ write compositions.
3. ________________ learn vocabulary.
4. ________________ answers questions in English.
5. ________________ read newspapers.
6. ________________ sing songs.
7. ________________ take tests.
8. ________________ complete exercises.
9. ________________ give speeches in English.
10. ________________ dance.

17. Practice
Work with a partner. Ask and answer questions about the chart. Write your
answers.
Qualities TV Journalist Fashion Model Doctor
have a degree X
be a good speaker X
be attractive X
be scientific X

1. TV journalist/have a degree
Does a TV journalist have to have a degree ?
No, he/she doesn’t
2. TV journalist/be a good speaker
____________________________________________________ ?
____________________
3. TV journalist/be attractive

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 207
 ____________________________________________________ ?
____________________
4. TV journalist/be scientific
____________________________________________________ ?
____________________
5. model/have a degree
____________________________________________________ ?
____________________
6. model/be a good speaker
____________________________________________________ ?
____________________
7. model/be attractive
____________________________________________________ ?
____________________

8. model/be scientific
____________________________________________________ ?
____________________
9. doctor/have a degree
____________________________________________________ ?
____________________
10. doctor/be a good speaker
____________________________________________________ ?
____________________
11. doctor/be attractive
____________________________________________________ ?
____________________
12. doctor/be scientific
____________________________________________________ ?
____________________

18. Practice

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 208
 Complete the sentences with mustn’t or don’t have to.
1. You don’t have to wash it by hand. You can wash it in a washing
machine.
2. You park here between 9:00 A.M. and 12:00 P.M. That is
when the city cleans the street.
3. You buy tickets at the box office. You can buy them
online.
4. You smoke in this restaurant. It is against the law.
5. You turn onto this street. Traffic is going one-way in the
opposite direction.
6. You pay for children under the age of five. They get in
free.
7. You _____________________ rollerblade on the sidewalk. It is against park
regulations.
8. You pay with cash. You can use a credit card.

19. Practice
A. This is Gloria Glamour. She was a famous movie star. She was also a millionaire.
Complete the sentences with had to or didn’t have to.

1. She had to wear make up.

2. She drive her car. She had a chauffeur.
3. She wait for the bus.
4. She meet important people.
5. She clean her house. She paid someone to clean her house for
her.
6. She act in movies.
7. She sing and dance.
8. She look beautiful.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 209
 B. What other things did she have to or not have to do? Make sentences with a
partner.

20. Practice
A.
1. Tell your partner three things you had to do as a child.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 210
 2. Tell your partner three things you didn’t have to do as a child.

Examples:
I had to go to bed at 8:00 P.M.
I didn’t have to cook dinner.

B. Write sentences about what your partner had to do and didn’t have to do as a
child.
Example:
Suzanne had to clean her room, but she didn’t have to wash dishes.
1. ___________________________________________________ .
2. ___________________________________________________ .
3. ___________________________________________________ .
4. ___________________________________________________ .
5. ___________________________________________________ .
6. ___________________________________________________ .

H. May I, Can I, and Could I

Form : Teller: May I see your driver’s license or a piece of
Identification?
Woman: Yes, of course. Here it is.
Teller: Thanks
QUESTIONS SHORT ANSWERS
May/Can Could I Base Verb Affirmative Negative
May your Of course.
Can I See license? Yes, of course. I’m
Could Certainly. sorry. I
Sure.* don’t
No problem.* have it
with me.
May
Can I Help you? Yes, please. No,

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 211
 Could thanks.
*Use these expressions with friends or family members.
Function : Hotel Desk: May I help you?
Guest: Could I have the key to Room 17 please?

1. We use may I, can I, and could I to ask for permission. We also use these
expressions to offer to help someone else.
2. May I, can I, and could I have the same meaning, but may I is the most polite
or formal. Could I is more polite than can I. Could I is appropriate in almost
all situations.

21. Practice
Complete the dialogues with may I, can I, or could I.
1. Student: May I go home early?
Teacher: No, you may not.
2. Student: borrow your dictionary?
Classmate: Sure.
3. Brother: use your phone?
Sister: No, you can’t.
4. Customer: _____________ have another class of water?
Waiter: Certainly, sir.
5. Employee: ______________ ask a question, sir?
Director of company: Yes, of course.
6. Police officer: ______________ see your driver’s license?
Driver: Sure. Here it is.

22. Practice
Work with a partner. Ask and answer questions with may I, can I, and could I in
these situations.
Example:
You are a teenager. You want to go to a party tonight. Ask a parent.
Teenager: Can I go to a party tonight please, Dad?

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 212
 Father: OK, you can go, but be back at 11:00.

1. You’re an attendant at the theater. You want to see a person’s ticket.

2. You are a customer in a restaurant. You do not have a fork to eat with. Ask the server.
3. You work in an office. You want to speak to your boss for a moment. Ask your boss.
4. Your teacher is carrying a lot of books. Ask if you can help.
5. Your friend is having trouble with her computer. You can fix it. Ask her.
6. You want to take next Monday off from school to go to the doctor. Ask your teacher.
7. You want to watch a movie on television tonight at 9:00. There is only one television
in the house. Your sister is the only person who watches it. Ask your sister.
8. You are in a cafeteria with a tray of food. There is only one empty seat at a table, but
there is someone sitting at the table. Ask if you can sit there.

23. Practice
WRITING: Write a Letter of Advice
Write a letter offering advice.

Step 1. Read the situation and tell what your friend should/shouldn’t do, must/must
not do, and has/doesn’t have to do.

A friend is coming to your country. The friend is invited to dinner at an important

person’s house and has asked for your advice.
1. take flowers/gift 4. be late/early arriving
2. wear nice/clean clothes 5. bring a friend
3. take shoes/coat off 6. say the food is good/bad

Step 2. Write the six sentences from Step 1. Add your own ideas.
1. You should take a gift or flowers 4. ________________________
2. __________________________ 5. ________________________
3. __________________________ 6. ________________________

Step 3. Rewrite your sentences as the second paragraph in the letter below.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 213
 May 1, 20XX
Dear Anita,
I’m so happy that you are coming for a
visit. Of course, you will stay with us. It’s
exciting that you are going to have dinner with
the mayor of our city. Here’s my advice about
that.

Step 4. Evaluate your paragraph.

Checklist
______ Did you use verb tenses correctly?
______ Did you give all of the important information that your friend will need?
______ Did you use the words, should, must, and have to?

Step 5. Edit your paragraph with a partner. Correct spelling, punctuation,

vocabulary, and grammar.

Step 6. Write your final copy.

II. MODAL VERBS (2)

REMEMBER!
 The modal verbs are: can, could, may, might, will, would, shall, should, must.
 We use a modal verb with a main verb to express ability, obligation, etc.
 We use the infinitive without to after modal verbs: I can speak English. (Not I can
to speak English.)
 Modal verbs do not add –s after he/she/it: He can drive. (Not He cans drive.)
 In negative sentences and questions, the auxiliary do/does is not necessary: Could
you open the window? (Not Do you could open the window?) You mustn’t be so
careless.
 Modals verbs do not have tense forms. We use other verbs instead: I wasn’t able to
go to the party. We had to get up early.
 These verbs and expressions have similar meanings to modal verbs: be able to, have
to, need to, be allowed to, ought to.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 214
A. Ability and possibility: can, could, be able to
 We use can to talk about ability and possibility in the present: I can swim. He can’t
drive. Can we buy stamps here?
 Be able to has a similar meaning to can, but it is not as common: I’m sorry, I’m not
able to take your call right now.
 We use could or was/were able to to talk about general ability and possibility in the
past: She could/was able to read by the age of four.
 For a single action that was completed successfully, we use was/were able to, not
could: Were you able to buy a ticket for the concert?(Not Could you buy a ticket for
the concert?)
 We use couldn’t and wasn’t/weren’t able to for both general situations and single
actions: We couldn’t/weren’t able to phone you yesterday.

1. PRACTICE
a. Re-write the sentences. Use be able to.
Example:
Tara can make paper birds. Tara is able to make paper birds.
1. Bob couldn’t read until he was six.
2. We can see the sea from our window.
3. Not many people can drive a bus.
4. We could speak to them in English.
5. They couldn’t dance or sing.
6. I couldn’t understand the film.
b. Cross out one of the answers if it is incorrect.
Example:
United could / were able to win the match in extra time. The score was 3-2.
1. The shop could / was able to repair my computer, but it was expensive.
2. After several years in Spain, Gary could / was able to speak Spanish fluently.
3. Could you / Were you able to create web pages after the computer course?
4. I failed my first driving test, but I could / was able to pass the second time.
5. Jessie couldn’t / wasn’t able to cook until she was an adult.
6. We couldn’t / weren’t able to ski yesterday because it was snowing heavily.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 215
 c. Re-write the sentences. Use the words in brackets.
Example:
I didn’t know how to dance, so I decided to take lessons. (could)
I decided to take lessons because I couldn’t dance.
1. Luckily, I managed to find classes near my house. (able)
Luckily, I classes near my house.
2. At first, I was nervous and it was impossible for me to do what the teacher
said. (could)
At first, I was nervous, so I what the teacher said.
3. Now, I’m still not a fantastic dancer, but I enjoy it. (can’t)
Now, I’m still very well, but I enjoy it.
4. And I know how to dance lots of different styles. (able)
And I lots of different styles.

B. Permission: can, could, be allowed to

 We use can or am/is/are allowed to to talk about things we have permission to do: All
students can/are allowed to use the computers. Can I smoke? No, you can’t. Are
candidates allowed to use dictionaries? Yes, they are.
 We use could or was/were allowed to to talk about permission in the past: We
could/were allowed to wear jeans at school. (We had permission.)
 We use Can I…? or Could I…? to ask someone for their permission. Could is more
formal or polite: Can I use your phone, Kate? Could I use the phone, please, Mrs.
Wilson?
 To give permission, we can say: Yes, all right/of course. Certainly.
 To refuse permission, we can say: No, sorry, you can’t./I’m afraid not.
 We often give a reason for refusing permission: Can I borrow your car? No, you can’t.
It’s at the garage.

We cannot use Am I allowed to…? to ask someone for their permission: Can we borrow
your ladder, please? (Not Are we allowed to borrow your ladder, please?)

2. PRACTICE

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 216
 a. Complete the sentences. Use one or two words in each gap.
Example:
Jenny couldn’t leave work early yesterday.
1. A: Are we to borrow three DVDs from the library?
B: No, you , I’m afraid. The limit is two per person.
2. A: Excuse me, sir we use your phone, please?
B: I’m afraid . It’s out of order.
3. I wasn’t allowed go to the music festival last month.
4. Dave borrows my bicycle if he likes, but he must return it
soon.
5. you allowed to wear make-up when you were a child?
6. A: I open the window please? It’s very hot in here.
B: Yes, of ______________ . You also open the
door if you like.
7. She ________________ wear trousers to work at the bank, but she isn’t
allowed to wear jeans.
8. A: Excuse me, we book a tennis court at two
o’clock, please?
B: Sorry, you can’t. They’re all booked today, but you
play tomorrow.
b. Re-write the sentences. Use the words in the brackets.
Example:
In the past boys were allowed to do a lot more than girls. (could)
In the past boys could do a lot more than girls.
1. Are we allowed to swim in this part of the river? (can)
in this part of the river?
2. The children can stay up late on Saturdays. (are)
The children late on Saturdays.
3. When we are ten, we were allowed to go to the park on our own. (could)
When we are ten, we to go to the park on our own.
4. We could take our dog on the beach in France. (to)
We our dog on the beach in France.
5. Jamie is allowed to come on holiday with us this summer. (can)
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 217
 Jamie on holiday with us this summer.
6. Could you take photos inside the museum? (allowed)
Were photos inside the museum?
7. Visitors were allowed to feed the animals at the safari park. (could)
Visitors were allowed to feed the animals at the safari
park.
8. You’re allowed to play on the computer if no one else needs it. (can)
You on the computer if no one else needs it.

C. Possibility: may, might, could

 We use may, might, or could to talk about actions or events that are possible now or in
the future: Pete may be in Paris now, Jill might phone me later. It could rain this
afternoon.
 We use may not or might not, but not could not, to say it is possible that an action or
event will not happen now or in the future: They may not come tomorrow. (Not They
couldn’t come tomorrow.) Pete might not be there now. (Not Pete couldn’t be there
now.)

The short form of might not is mightn’t. May not does not have a short form.

3. PRACTICE
a. Re-write the sentences. Use the words in brackets.
Example:
It’s possible I’ll go to France. (may) I may go to France.
1. Maybe they’re brothers. (might) They___________ brothers.
2. Maybe you’ll see Ann in town. (could) You _________ Ann in town.
3. Perhaps she doesn’t have a computer. (may) She _______ a computer.
4. It’s possible we won’t go out tonight. (might) We _________ out tonight.
5. It’s possible she doesn’t want to play. (may) She ___________ to play.
6. Perhaps he’s at the cinema. (could) He__________ at the cinema.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 218
 b. Complete the e-mail. Use the words in the box.

could go could meet may not be may work

might ask might do might not have

Hi, Kathy!

Thanks for your e-mail. You asked us what our plans are for the summer.
Well, Connie (0) could go to England to work, like she did last
year. Jon says he (1) somethiing different this summer. He
wants to go to India, so he (2) for a few weeks or he (3)
enough money. Idon’t want to work in the family hotel
again. I’d like a change. I (4) my parents for the money to
come to Florida, so it (5) long before I see you again. I (6)
your family. What do you think? Write soon!

Esther

D. Certainty and deduction: must, can’t

 We use must to say we are sure that something is true now because of what we know:
They own three cars. They must have a lot of money.
 We use can’t when we think something is impossible now because of what we know:
She can’t be at home. There are no lights on.

Can’t is the opposite of must here.

4. PRACTICE
a. Circle the correct answer.
Example:
A: I thought Meena was coming. B: She is. She must / can’t be outside.
1 A: Is that Britney Spears? B: No, it must / can’t be! She’s in America.
2 A: Zack has five hundred CDs. B: Wow! He must / can’t love music.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 219
 3 A: Rachel lives in France. B: She must / can’t speak French, then.
4 A: Davy isn’t here today. B: He must / can’t be ill again. Poor Davy!
5 A: I’ve just eaten a big pizza. B: Well, you must / can’t be hungry, then.
6 A: Hurry up, it’s time to go! B: It must / can’t be nine o’clock already!
b. Complete the sentences. Use must or can’t and the verbs in brackets.
Example:
A furniture van has arrived next door. Our new neighbors must be here. (be)
1. There’s a lot of beautiful old furniture. They_________ antiques. (collect)
2. There are toys in those boxes. They _________ children. (have)
3. The neighbors have just arrived in a taxi. They ________ a car. (own)
4. They’re both over sixty, so the toys __________ to their children. (be)
5. I suppose they ___________ for their grandchildren. (be)
6. I don’t see any animals. They ___________ any pets. (have)
7. I’ve just seen a snake! The snake __________theirs, surely? (be)

E. Request: can, could, would

 We use Can you…? Could you…? and Would you…? to ask somebody to do
something: Can you lend me a pen? Could you open the door, please? Would you
open your books, please?
 We use can in neutral or informal situations: Can you move your chair, please?
 We use could to be more polite, or when we want people to do something difficult:
Mike, could you lend me some money?
 We often use would to be polite, especially when we are giving a polite order: Would
you be quiet, please?
 We also use would if we are speaking from a position of authority: Would you get on
with your work, please? Would you get my lawyer on the phone for me?

5. PRACTICE
a. Complete the requests. Use the verbs in the box and the words in brackets.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 220
 bring help lend pass pay phone sign

Example:
Would you sign __________ your name on the dotted line, please? (would)
1. Dad, _______________ me the newspaper on the table? (can)
2. Alba, _______________ for a taxi, please? I’m very late. (would)
3. Waiter, _______________ us some more bread, please? (could)
4. Danny, _______________ me find my coat? I’ve lost it! (can)
5. _______________ me five pounds until the weekend, Helen? (could)
6. _______________ attention when I’m speaking? (would)
b. Write requests. Use can or could.
Example:
You need change for the ticket machine. You only have a five-pound note.
You ask: Could you change this five-pound note for me?

1. You want your friend to lend you his DVD of Lord of the Rings tonight.
You ask:
2. You want your English teacher to translate a song for you.
You ask:
3. You want a friend to lend you his camera for a week.
You ask:
4. Your neighbors are playing loud music. You want them to turn it down.
You ask:
5. Your computer isn’t working properly. You want your brother to look at it.
You ask:
6. You have asked a stranger for directions, but you want him to speak more slowly.
You ask:

F. Offers and suggestions: will, shall, can, could

 We use I/We will… and Shall I/we…? to offer to do something for somebody.
- I/We will… is quite informal: We’ll drive you to the station if you like.
- Shall I/we…? is more polite. Shall I help you carry your bags?

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 221
  We can use shall, can and could to suggest something: Shall we go out? We can go and
see a film. We could go to a restaurant. (could=less sure)
 We can also use expressions like these to make suggestions: Let’s go skating. Why
don’t we try that new Chinese restaurant? How/What about having a picnic at the
weekend if the weather’s fine? (How/What about=informal)

6. PRACTICE
Re-write the sentences. Use the words in brackets.
Example:
I suggest we go for a walk in the country tomorrow. (let’s)
Let’s go for a walk in the country tomorrow.

1. I think it’s a good idea to take sandwiches with us. (can)

_______________________________________________________ .
2. Do you want me to lend you a good pair of walking shoes? (shall)
_______________________________________________________ .
3. I’d like to go to the Lake District. (how about)
_______________________________________________________ .
4. A good way to get there is by bus. (could)
_______________________________________________________ .
5. I can find out the bus times, if you like. (I’ll)
_______________________________________________________ .
6. I suggest we stay the weekend. (why don’t we)
_______________________________________________________ .
7. Do you think it’s a good ideas to take a tent and camp? (shall)
_______________________________________________________ .
8. I’d like us to stay in a youth hostel. (what about)
_______________________________________________________ .
9. Yes, I think it’s a good idea to stay in the youth hostel. (let’s)
_______________________________________________________ .

7. Practice : Check Modal verbs (1)

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 222
1. Complete the conversations. Use the 3. Re-write the sentences. Use the words
words in the box. in brackets.
14. Jonas could run faster than anyone
can’t could could I’ll how shall
else at school. (able)
A: Nicky, (1)……………….. you look Jonas ………….. run faster than
at my computer? The Internet isn’t anyone else at school.
working. 15. When he was eleven, his parents
B: maybe there’s loose connection. gave him permission to join an
A: No, everything’s fine. It (2) athletic clubs. (allowed)
……………….be that. When he was eleven, he…………
(3)……………… have a look at it join an athletic club.
after supper. 16. I’m certain he has a good chance of
A: (4)…………... about organizing a getting into the national team.
birthday party for Tania? (must)
B: Good idea! We (5) …………..have He…….......... a good chance of
it at my place. (6) I ask my getting into the national team.
flatmates? 17. It’s possible that he’ll win an
A: Yes, that would be fantastic! Olympic medal one day. (may)
2. Circle the correct answer.
8. I’m sorry I’m not able to/ couldn’t He…………….. an Olympic medal
meet you yesterday. I was busy all one day.
day.
9. I’m looking for my address book. It 4. Circle the correct answer.
must/ couldn’t be here somewhere. With the MX3007 digital camera you
10. When Steven pushed the door, he (17) can’t/will/might go wrong! You
(18) can/are able/would look at each
was able to / could open it. photo after you’ve taken it. If you
11. Club members are allowed to / don’t like it, just delete it. Taking the
perfect photo is easy! And with a
would bring a friend once a month. credit card you (19) can/couldn’t/shall
12. Could / Shall you open the door for buy online today. The MX3007 (20) is
allowed to/could/must be yours at the
me, please? click of a mouse. Don’t wait, click
13. Before she got he own car, Kali NOW!
could / can borrow he mother’s car.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 223
G. Obligation and necessity: must, have to, need to
 We use must and have to express obligation or necessity, but there is a difference in
meaning.
- We use must when the speaker thinks that it is necessary to do something: I must go –
it’s late. You must have a haircut soon. You must be home by midnight.
- We use have to when an action is necessary because another person says so, or there is
a rule: You have to be seventeen to drive a car. (It’s the law.)
 We can also use need to to say that something is necessary: I’m bad at tennis. I need to
practice.
 Must has no past form; we use had to: We had to study philosophy at school.
 The past of need to is needed to: They needed to win the match to stay in the league.
 To ask if something is necessary, we usually use have to or need to, not must. We form
questions with do/does/did: Do you have to help at home? Do we need to buy any
food? Did she need to take a taxi?

8. PRACTICE
a. Circle the correct answer.
Example:
I haven’t got any stamps. I need to / had to go to the post office.
1. Does Marlon have to / must wear a tie at work?
2. Maggie has to / had to look after her baby niece yesterday.
3. Did you must / need to buy more food, or was there enough?
4. When you arrive at a hotel, you have to / has to register at reception.
5. Excuse me, do new students must / need to go to the registration office?
6. Jason must / have to stop arriving late, or he’ll be in trouble!
b. Complete the sentences. Use the correct form of the words in brackets.
Example:
My hair is too long. I need to get a haircut. (need to / get)

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 224
 1. Her watch is broken. She ___________ a new one. (have to / buy)
2. I couldn’t stay in my old flat. I ________ another one. (have to / find)
3. We haven’t got any food! We _________ to the supermarket. (must / go)
4. It’s only six o’clock. _________ we _________ now? (need to / leave)
5. Your room is dirty. Your really ____________ it! (must / clean)
6. Was the concert free, or ________ you ___________ ? (have to / pay)
c. Circle the correct answer.
A: What was the hardest thing about working on breakfast TV?
B: Definitely the worst thing was that I (0) must / had to / have to get up at four o’clock in
the morning, so I (1) must / has to / needed to be in bed by eight at night, when all my
friends were enjoying themselves.
A: Did you ever sleep late?
B: Oh, yes! Several times! The producer (2) must / had to / need to phone me to wake me
up.
A: In your new job do you (3) must / have to / needs to spend a lot on clothes?
B: Yes, I (4) must / have to / need wear different clothes every day. It’s in my contract!
A: (5) Must / Has / Does a TV presenter need to have any special qualifications?
B: No, not really, but in my opinion, you (6) must / has to / need understand how the
studio works, or you’ll never be really good.

H. Prohibition: mustn’t, can’t, not be allowed to

 We use mustn’t, can’t and not allowed to to say that something is forbidden:
You mustn’t tell anyone; it’s a secret. Sorry, you can’t eat or drink in here. They aren’t
allowed to have visitors in the hostel.
 We use couldn’t and wasn’t/weren’t allowed to, not mustn’t, to say that something was
forbidden in the past: We couldn’t play football in the street. I wasn’t allowed to walk
to school on my own.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 225
9. PRACTICE
a. Look at the signs. Then complete the sentences. Use the words in brackets.
Example: 1. 2. 3.
NO DO NOT SIT DO NOT
DO NOT SIT SWIMMING ON THE TOUCH
ON THE DANGER GRASS
GRASS

DO4NOT 5 DO NOT 6
NO
ENTER USE THE SMOKING
COMPUTER

Example:
You are not allowed to sit on the grass in the park. (allowed)
1 People ______________ here. It’s dangerous. (mustn’t)
2 You in the library. (allowed)
3 Visitors the exhibits in the museum. (mustn’t)
4 They the building without permission. (can’t)
5 Students the computers without permission. (can’t)
6 We in the restaurant last night. (allowed)
b. Complete the article. Use the words in the box.

can’t / leave can’t / sit couldn’t / have mustn’t / talk

not allowed / do not allowed / drink not allowed / listen

Mick hates his new job. He and his colleagues have to work long hours, but they (1)
can’t sit down and they (2) to the radio. They (3)
to each other either. They (4) anything except work! Yesterday
Mick felt ill, but he (5) a rest because he was so busy. He (6)
even a glass of water. The problem is that the job’s well-paid and he needs
the money, so he (7) .

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 226
I. Lack of necessity: don’t have to, don’t need to
 We use don’t have to, didn’t have to, don’t need to and didn’t need to to say that
something is not or was not necessary: You don’t have to wait for me. I’ll come later. I
didn’t need to take a jacket – it was quite hot.
Must and have to are similar, but mustn’t and don’t have to are different. Compare:
I mustn’t go. (It’s forbidden to go.) I don’t have to go. (It isn’t necessary for me to
go. I can decide.)

10. PRACTICE
a. Match the sentence halves

Work in our Adventure Park

Do you want to do something different every day?
No experience necessary. 3-day training course. Choose meanings or evenings – or both!
We provide: a uniform, free accommodation in a hostel, transport to the Park. Work with us!
Apply now to: jmorrison@BAP.co.uk

1 You don’t have to do a in the morning if you don’t want to.

2 You don’t have to train b the same thing every day.
3 You don’t have to work c your own uniform.
4 You don’t have to pay d a car to work.
5 You don’t have to drive e for your accommodation.
6 You don’t have to buy f for a long time.
7 You don’t have to have g any experience.

b. Circle the correct answer.

Example: You mustn’t /don’t have to say things like that. It’s cruel.
1. Oh, it’s only Monday. I mustn’t / don’t need to return my library books today.
2. When we were children, my brother mustn’t / didn’t have to do the washing up.
3. Office workers mustn’t usually / don’t usually have to work at weekends.
4. Emma didn’t have to / doesn’t need to wait very long at the doctor’s yesterday.
5. You mustn’t / don’t have to be late for the coach. It leaves at six.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 227
 6. We mustn’t / didn’t need to spend a lot on holiday. Everything was very cheap.
c. Complete the sentences. Use the correct form of the words in brackets.
Example:
I ate a big lunch before I went, so I didn’t need to eat there. (need to / eat)
1 We any food. The fridge was already full. (need to / get)
2 Now he’s retired from football, he every day. (have to / train)
3 The flowers were lovely, but you me anything! (need to / give)
4 You smart clothes to the party. Jeans are fine. (have to / wear)
5 Lucie to town. Her sister took her in the car. (have to / walk)
6 Why is Mary buying shoes again? She any more! (need to / buy)
7 The house is in perfect condition. They it. (need to / paint)
8 I last night. We went out to eat. (have to / cook)

J. Advice: should, ought to, must

 We should and ought to to give advice: You should stay at college. You ought to help
her. (It’s a good thing to do.) You shouldn’t leave. You ought not to spend so much
money. (It’s not a good thing to do.)
 We often use should to ask for advice: What should we do?

We often use think in negative sentences and questions: I don’t think you should
worry. (You shouldn’t worry.) Do you think I should buy a new shirt?

 We also use must / mustn’t to give strong advice: You must go and see his new film!
You mustn’t forget to visit the castle on the hill.

11. PRACTICE
a. Write sentences.
Example: you / should / take / more exercise
You should take more exercise.
1. you / must / try / the new kebab restaurant

2. I / should / eat / more vegetables?

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 228
 3. she / should / not / go out / every night

4. I / think / they / ought / join / a gym

5. You / think / I / should / get / a haircut?

6. You / ought / not / watch / so much TV

b. Complete the letters. Use the words in the box.

mustn’t ought to drink ought to talk should also try
should I should take shouldn’t do

Dear Abby,
I’ve got a problem. I can’t sleep these days
and I’m always tired. My sister thinks that I
(0) should take sleeping pills. My mum says
I (1) hot milk before bed. And
my best friend says I (2)
anything because it’s normal. Who (3)
listen to? Please help!
Dear Donna,
This is a difficult problem. First of all, I
think you (4) to your doctor. Pills
may not be the answer. You (5) to
relax before you got to bed. And lastly, your
friend is right. You (6) worry about
it. Sleep problems don’t usually last for very
long.
Good luck!

12. Practice: Check Modal verbs (2)

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 229
1. Circle the correct answer. 3. Complete the sentences. Use the
1 I mustn’t / ‘m not allowed to wear correct form of have to, be allowed to
jeans at work. and can.
2 You mustn’t / ought give up 11 It’s necessary for her to check in two
football. The teams need you. hours before her flight.
3 You don’t have to / mustn’t pay to She check in two
get into the museum – it’s free. hours before her flight.
4 She didn’t need to / mustn’t get a 12 Passengers are forbidden to have
taxi because there was a free bus. more than 20 kilos of luggage.
5 It’s not a very popular restaurant, so Passengers have
we mustn’t / don’t have to book a more than 20 kilos of luggage.
table. 13 You can’t reserve a seat before the
flight.
2. Complete the interview. Use the You to reserve a
words in the box. seat before the flight.

didn’t have to had have to 14 It’s necessary for passengers to show

needed to wasn’t allowed to a boarding pass before they get on
the plane.
A: Was your childhood very strict? Passengers show a
B: No, I had a lot of freedom, but I (6) boarding pass before they get on the
go home late at night on my own. plane.
A: Did you (7) help in 15 It’s forbidden to use a mobile phone
the house? during the flight.
B: Yes, I was the eldest of four, so I (8) You aren’t use a
to look after the others, but I (9) mobile phone during the flight.
do a lot of
housework. School was different! I 4. Complete the sentences. Use the
(10) words in brackets.
do a lot of extra work to pass my 16 Amir and Bimal eat a lot of sweets.
exams. (shouldn’t)
‘You so many
sweets.’
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 230
 17 Tony doesn’t get enough sleep. 19 Jan doesn’t eat any fruit. (ought)
(must) ‘You some fruit.’
‘You some more 20 Joy tells people my secrets. (mustn’t)
sleep.’ ‘You people my
18 You think Amy should see the film. secrets.’
(must)
‘You the film.’

CHAPTER 6
ADJECTIVE AND ADVERB

I. ADJECTIVE
A. Introduction to adjectives
1. Use
PARADISE APARTMENTS
An excellent choice for an independent summer holiday, these large apartments are
along an inland waterway in a quiet residential area. The friendly resort of Gulftown
with its beautiful white sandy beach is only a short walk away. Restaurant and gift
shop nearby.

An adjective modifies a noun. The adjectives here express physical and other qualities
(large, quiet, friendly) and the writer’s opinion or attitude (excellent, beautiful). The
adjective residential classifies the area, tells us what type of area it is.

Adjectives can also express other meanings such as origin (an American writer), place
(an inland waterway), frequency (a weekly newspaper), degree (a complete failure),
necessity (an essential safeguard) and degrees of certainty (the probable result).

NOTE
a. We use adjectives of quality to answer the question What…like?
What’s the area like? ~ Oh, it’s very quiet.
Adjectives of type answer the question What kind of…?
What kind of area is it? ~ Mainly residential.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 231
 b. A modifier can also be a noun, e.g. a summer holiday, a gift shop.

2. Form
a. An adjective always has the same form. There are no endings for number or gender.
an old man an old woman old people
But some adjectives take comparative and superlative endings.
My wife is older than I am. This is the oldest building in the town.
b. Most adjectives have no special form to show that they are adjectives. But there are
some endings used to form adjectives from other words.
careful planning a salty taste global warming artistic merit

B. The position of adjectives

1. An adjective phrase can have one or more adjectives.
a large stadium a large, empty stadium
For details about the order of adjectives,

An adverb of degree can come before an adjective.

A very large stadium an almost empty stadium
A very large, almost empty stadium
NOTE
a. The adverb enough follows the adjective.
Will the stadium be large enough?
b. We can put a phrase of measurement before some adjectives.
The man is about forty years old and six feet tall.
2. An adjective can go before a noun or as complement after a linking verb such as be,
seem, get. These positions are called ‘attributive’ and ‘predicative’.
Attributive: It is a large stadium. (before a noun)
Predicative: The stadium is large. (as complement)
3. These adjectives are in attributive position.
Canterbury is a lovely city. I bought a black and white sweater.
A noisy party kept us awake. It’s a difficult problem.
4. These adjectives are in predicative position.
Canterbury is lovely. The sweater was black and white.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 232
 The party seemed very noisy. Things are getting so difficult.

NOTE
a. An adjective can also be an object complement.
Why must you make things difficult? A noisy party kept us awake.
b. We can use an adjective in an exclamation with how.
How lovely the view is! How cold your hands are!
An adjective can also be a one-word reply, e.g. Oh, good./Lovely.
5. In these patterns we leave out words before a predicative adjective.
a. I’ve got a friend keen on fishing,
(= … a friend who is keen on fishing.)
b. Could you let me know as soon as possible?
(= … as soon as it is possible.)
I don’t want to spend any more money than necessary.
Chris went to bed later than usual.
We can do this with a few adjectives after as or than.
c. Pick the fruit when ripe,
(= … when it is ripe.)
Work the putty in your hands until soft.
If possible, I should like some time to think it over.
Although confident of victory, we knew it would not be easy.
This pattern with a conjunction is found mainly in written English and
especially in instructions how to do something.
6. In rather formal or literary English an adjective can go before or after a noun phrase,
separated from it by a comma.
Uncertain, the woman hesitated and looked round.
The weather, bright and sunny, drove us out of doors.
C. Adjectives used in one position only
Most adjectives can be either in attributive position (nice weather) or in
predicative position (the weather is nice). But a few go in one position but not
in the other.

1. Attributive only
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 233
 That was the main reason, NOT That reason was main.
The story is utter nonsense.
Inner ring road

These adjectives are attributive but not predicative: chef, elder (=older), eldest
(= oldest), eventual, former (= earlier), indoor, inner, main, mere (a mere child = only
a child), only, outdoor, outer, principal (= main), sheer (=complete), sole (=only),
upper, utter (=complete).
NOTE
a. Little is mostly attributive.
a little/small cottage the cottage is small.
b. Some cannot be predicative except with the.
Yes, I had the same experience./Yes. My experience was the same.
c. A noun as modifier can only be attributive.
a tennis club a water pipe afternoon tea.
But nouns saying what something is made of can go in wither position.
It’s a metal pipe,/The pipe is metal.
2. Predicative only
The children were soon asleep, NOT the asleep children.
The manager seemed pleased with the sales figures.
One person was ill and couldn’t come.
These adjectives are predicative but not attributive.
Some words with the prefix a: asleep, awake, alive, afraid, ashamed, alone, alike
Some words expressing feelings: pleased, glad, content, upset
Some words to do with health: well, fine, ill, unwell
NOTE
a. Many of these adjectives can be attributive if they are modified by an adverb.
the wide awake children
an extremely pleased customer
b. There is sometimes a word that we can use attributively instead of one with the prefix
a.
a sleeping child NOT an asleep child
a living person NOT an alive person
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 234
 the frightened animal NOT the afraid animal
c. Pleased, glad and upset can be attributive when not referring directly to people.
a pleased expression the glad news an upset stomach
3. Different meanings in different positions
Either position
Attributive only Attributive Predicative
a real hero real wood The wood is real.
(degree) (= not false)
a perfect idiot a perfect day The day was perfect.
(degree) (= excellent)
You poor thing! a poor result The result was poor.
(sympathy) (= not good)
poor people The people are poor.
(= having little money)

Predicative only
a certain address I’m certain.
(= specific) (= sure)
the present situation I was present.
(= now) (= here / there)
a late bus The bus was late.
(= near the end of the day) (= not on time)
the late president
(= dead)

4. A beautiful dancer
In phrases like a beautiful dancer, an interesting writer, a heavy smoker, a
frequent visitor, an old friend, the adjective usually modifies the action not
the person.
Attributive Predicative
She’s a beautiful dancer The dancer is beautiful.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 235
 (= Her dancing is beautiful.) (= The dancer is a beautiful person.)
He was a frequent visitor.
(= His visits were frequent.)

D. Adjectives after nouns and pronouns

1. Some adjectives can have a prepositional phrase after them.
People were anxious for news. The field was full of
sheep.
The adjective + prepositional phrase cannot go before the noun, but it can go directly
after it.
People anxious for news kept ringing the emergency number.
We walked across a field full of sheep.

2. Sometimes the position of the adjective depends on the meaning

The amount of money involved is quite small. (= relevant)
It’s a rather involved story. (= complicated)
The person concerned is at lunch. I’m afraid. (= relevant)
A number of concerned people have joined the protest. (= worried)
There were ten members of stuff present. (=there)
Our present problems are much worse. (=now)
Judy seems a responsible person. (= sensible)
The person responsible will be punished. (= who did it)
NOTE
a. Available can come before or after a noun.
The only available tickets./The only tickets available were very expensive.
b. Possible can come after the noun when there is a superlative adjective.
We took the shortest possible route./The shortest route possible.
c. The adjective follows the noun in a few titles and idiomatic phrases.
the Director General a Sergeant Major
the Princess Royal the sum total
3. Adjectives come after a compound with every, some, any and no
Let’s find somewhere quiet. You mustn’t do anything silly.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 236
E. The order of adjectives
1. Attributive adjectives
a. When a two or more adjectives come before a noun, there is usually a fairly fixed
order.
beautiful golden sands a nice new blue coat
The order depends mainly on the meaning. Look at these groups of adjectives
and other modifiers.
Opinion: nice, wonderful, excellent, lovely, terrible, awful, etc
Size: large, small, long, short, tall, etc
Quality: clear, busy, famous, important, quiet, etc
Age: old, new
Shape: round, square, fat, thin, wide, narrow, etc
Color: red, white, blue, green, etc
Participle forms: covered, furnished, broken, running, missing, etc
Origin: British, Italian, American, etc
Material: brick, paper, plastic, wooden, etc
Type: human, chemical, domestic, electronic, money (problems), etc
Purpose: alarm (clock), tennis (court), walking (boots), etc

Words from these groups usually come in this order:

opinion + size + quality + age + shape + color + participle forms + origin + material
+ type + purpose
an old cardboard box (age + material)
a German industrial company (origin + type)
two small round green discs (size + shape + color)
a large informative street plan (size + quality + type)
a hard wooden seat (quality + material)
a new improved formula (age + participle form)
increasing financial difficulties (participle form + type)
two excellent public tennis courts (opinion + type + purpose)

NOTE

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 237
 a. These rules are not absolute. The order can sometimes be different. We
sometimes prefer to put a short adjective before a long one.
a big horrible building
b. Child and young referring to people often come next to the noun.
a dignified old lady a pale young lady
Here old and young are unstressed.
c. Worth the material are monthly nouns (back), but some are adjectives
(wooden). Words for type can be adjectives (chemical) or nouns (money
problems). Words for purpose are nouns (alarm clock) or gerunds (walking
boots).
b. In general, the adjective closest to the noun has the closest link in meaning with the
noun and expresses what is most permanent about it. For example, in the phrase two
excellent public tennis courts, the word tennis is closely linked to courts, whereas
excellent is not linked so closely. The fact that the courts are for tennis is permanent,
but their excellence is a matter of opinion.
c. When two adjectives have similar meanings, the shorter one often come first.
a bright, cheerful smile a soft, comfortable chair
Sometimes two different orders are both possible.
a peaceful, happy place/a happy, peaceful place

2. And and but with attributive adjectives

a. We can sometimes put and between two adjectives.
a soft, comfortable chair./a soft and comfortable chair
But we do not normally use and between adjectives with different kinds
of meanings.
beautiful golden sounds (opinion, color)
b. We use and when the adjectives refer to different parts of something.
a black and white sweater (partly black and partly white)
We use but when the adjectives refer two qualities in contrast.
a cheap but effective solution

3. Predicative adjectives
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 238
 a. The order of predicative adjectives is less fixed than the older before a noun.
Except sometimes in a literary style, we use and before the last adjective.
The chair was soft and comfortable.
Adjectives expressing an opinion often come last.
The city is old and beautiful.
NOTE
We can use nice and lovely in this pattern with and.
The room was nice and warm. (=nicely warm)
b. We can use but when two qualities are in contrast.
The solution is cheap but effective.

F. Amusing and amused, interesting and interested

Compare the adjectives in ing and ed.
The show made us laugh. It was very amusing.
The audience laughed. They were very amused.
I talked to a very interesting man.
I was interested in what he was telling me.
I find these diagrams confusing.
I’m confused by these diagrams.
This weather is depressing, isn’t it?
Don’t you feel depressed when it rains.
Adjectives in ing express what something is like, the effect it has on us. For example, a
show can be amusing. Interesting or boring. Adjectives in ed express how we feel about
something. For example, the audience can feel amused, interested or bored.

Some pairs of adjectives like this are:

alarming/alarmed exciting/excited
amusing/amused fascinating/fascinated
annoying/annoyed puzzling/puzzled
confusing/confused relaxing/relaxed
depressing/depressed surprisingly/surprised
disappointing/disappointed tiring/tired

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 239
 NOTE: These words have the same form as active and passive participles.

G. The + adjective
1. Social groups
a. We can use the + adjective to refer to some groups of people in society.
In the England of 1900 little was done to help the poor. (=poor people)
Who looks after the old and the sick? (=old people and sick people)
The poor means ‘poor people in general’. It cannot refer to just one person or to a
small group. Here it means ‘poor people in England in 1900’. The poor is more
impersonal than poor people.

The + adjective takes a plural verb.

The old are greatly respected.

b. Here are some examples of adjectives used in this way.

Social/Economic: the rich, the poor, the strong, the weak, the hungry, the
(under) privileged, the disadvantaged, the unemployed, the homeless
Physical/Health: the blind, the deaf, the sick, the disabled, the
handicapped, the living, the dead
Age: the young, the middle-aged, the elderly, the old

The adjective can be modified by an adverb.

the very rich the severely disabled

Some adjectives normally take an adverb.

the more/less fortunate the mentally ill

NOTE
a. In a few contexts, the + adjective can mean a specific group rather than people in
general.
The injured were taken to hospital.
b. A few adjectives can come after a/an to mean a specific person.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 240
 Now a superstar, she was an unknown only two years ago.
c. There are a few adjectives that we can use as nouns, such as colour words. They
take s in the plural.
a black (= a black person) the Greens (=supporters of the green
movement)
2. Abstract qualities
a. We can use some adjectives after the to refer to things in general which have an
abstract quality.
There are a lot of books on the supernatural.
The human race has a great thirst for the unknown.
The supernatural means ‘supernatural happenings in general’. Other
examples: the mysterious, the unexplained, the absurd, the ordinary, the
old, the new.
The noun phrase takes a singular verb.
The new drives out the old.
b. A few adjectives can have a more specific meaning.
The unexpected happened (= something that was unexpected)
Have you heard the latest? (= the latest news)
Also fear the worst, hope for the best, in the dark
c. We use the + adjective + thing to talk about a particular quality or aspect of a
situation. This usage is rather informal.
It was an amusing sight, but the annoying thing (about it) was that I
didn’t have my camera with me.
We cannot leave out thing here.

II. ADJECTIVE (2)

A. Auxiliaries and verbs
1. Problems with auxiliaries
When it follows a modal, the auxiliary have is often pronounced like of and is therefore
sometimes misspelled of. The correct spelling is have after the modals in these
sentences:

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 241
 I should have said something about it long ago.
Somebody else would have paid.
You might have helped me.
She could have become the mayor.

The semi modal had better is often rendered as‘d better or better in speech: He
better not be late. Use the full expression in formal writing: He had better not be late.
Ought to should be the first verb in the verb phrase. Combinations such as didn’t
ought to and hadn’t ought to are non-standard.
2. Lie, lay
The intransitive verb he (‘be in a reclining position’) and the transitive verb lay
(‘place’) are often confused, because the past tense of lie is lay and the present tense of
lay is lay or lays. Here are the forms of the two verbs:

present tense lie, lies lay, lays

-ing participle lying laying
past tense lay laid
-ed participle lain laid

Here are examples of sentences with these verbs:

lie Is she lying on the sofa?
The children lay asleep on the floor.
I have lain in bed all morning.
lay Are you laying a bet on the next race?
He laid his head on his arms.
The hens have laid a dozen eggs this morning.
3. Present tense
Standard written English requires the –s inflection for the third person singular and no
inflection elsewhere:
John says. I say.
She knows. We know.
The dog bites. They bite.
It does. You do.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 242
 Forms such as I says, you knows, and it do are frequently used in casual
conversation, but they are non-standard forms and should therefore be avoided in
writing
Negative contractions sometimes cause difficulties. The standard contraction of
does not is doesn’t (she doesn’t), not don’t. Negative ain’t is commonly heard in
conversation as a contraction of various combination, including am not, is not, have
not, and has not, but it is not a standard form.

4. Past and –ed participle

Regular verbs have the same form for the past and the –ed participle:
He laughed loudly.
He hasn’t laughed so much for a long time.
Some irregular verbs have different forms:
She spoke to me about it.
She has spoken to me about it.
Except in written representations of non-standard speech, do not write non-standard
forms for the past and –ed participle:
I done my assignments. (Correct to did.)
We seen the movie last week. (Correct to saw.)
He was shook up by the news. (Correct to shaken.)
Some verbs have variant forms that are acceptable for both past and –ed participle:
dreamed, dreamt; kneeled, knelt; lighted, lit; shined, shone. The past and –ed
participle of hang is generally hanged in the sense ‘suspend by the neck until dead’
(He was hanged for murder) and is hung for all other meanings (The picture was hung
on the wall.)
5. Past and past subjunctive
The past subjunctive is used to refer to situations that are very unlikely or that are
contrary to the facts:
I wish she was here.
He believes as though he were your friend

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 243
 She looked angry.
She feels bad.
I don’t feel well.
He sounded nervous.
The flowers smell sweet.
The food tastes good.
The adverb badly is often used with the linking verb feel, but in formal writing use
feel bad. Well in I don’t feel well is an adjective meaning ‘in good health’. It is an
adverb in ‘He didn’t play well.’
If the word characterizes the manner of the action denoted by the verb, use an
adverb as formal writing:
She writes well. (Not: ‘She writes good’)
He hurt his neck badly. (Not: ‘He hurt his neck bad’)
Your dog is barking badly. (Not: ‘Your dog is barking loud’)
If the job is done satisfactorily, I will give him other jobs. (Not: ‘If the job is done
satisfactory . . .’)
Some words can have the same form for both the adjective and the adverb: early,
fast, hard, late, slow, quick, long, and words in –ly that are formed from nouns
denoting tense (hourly, daily). The adverbs slow, quick, and deep also have parallel
adverb forms in –ly, -slowly, quickly, and deeply. These three adverbs formed
without the –ly suffix are mainly used with imperatives:
Drive slow.
Come quick.
Dig deep into your pocket for a donation.
Both direct and directly are adverbs in the senses ‘in a straight line’ or ‘without
anything intervening’:
We fax our orders direct to London for immediate dispatch.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 244
 The Transcaucasia republics try to bypass Moscow by selling oil directly to
Ukrainian nationalists.

8. Comparison
Most adjectives and adverbs are gradable: we can view them as being on a scale of
less or more. Gradable words allow comparison (less foolish, more quickly) and
modification by intensifiers that show how far they are along the scale (somewhat foolish,
very quickly). Some adjectives and adverbs are not gradable; for example, we cannot say
more medical or very previously.
Writers vary on whether certain adjectives or adverbs are gradable. Those who treat
them as non-gradable think that they express the highest degree (excellent) or that they
cannot be measured on a scale (uniquely). The most common of these disputed words are
complete (ly), perfect (ly), unique (ly). Yet even in formal writing we find expressions
such as a more perfect union or the most extreme poverty. If you are in doubt, it is better
not to treat these words as gradable in formal writing.
Use the comparative for two only (the older of the two girls) and the superlative for
more than two (the oldest of the three girls). The comparative of the adjective bad and the
adverb badly is worse (not worser); the superlative is worst (not worsest).
Fewer goes with count nouns and less with non-count nouns.
demonstrators danger
fewer mistakes less money
votes time

9. Only
Where you put only in a sentence may affect how the reader understands the sentence. In
speech you can make your intention clear through your intonation, but when you write, it
is best to put only next to the word or phrase it refers to:
Only children can swim in the lake before noon. (not adults)
Children can only swim in the lake before noon. (not fish)
Children can swim only in the lake before noon. (not in the pool)
Children can swim in the lake only before noon. (not in the afternoon)
The following words should also be positioned with care: also, even, just, merely.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 245
 10. Dangling modifiers
Absolute clauses are non-finite or verb less adverbial clauses that have their own
subjects:
All their money having been spent on repairs, they applied to the bank for a loan.
He nervously began his speech, his voice trembling.
They strolled by the river, their heads bare.
If adverbial clauses have no subject of their own, their implied subject is generally the
same as the subject of the sentence:
Having spent all his money on a vacation to Hawaii, Norman applied to the bank
for a loan. (Norman has spent all his money on a vacation to Hawaii.)

B. COMPARISON
1. The comparative and superlative of adjectives
GOLD AND COPPER
Gold is much softer than copper, so it is easier to hammer into shape. It is not very
strong. A gold knife might look very fine but would not have been much use for
skinning a bear, so from early times gold became the metal for ornaments. Copper is
much harder; it would have been much more difficult for early man to shape, but the
finished article was more durable.
(from L. Aitchison The Story of Metals)

MIDTOWN MANHATTAN
Midtown Manhattan, which ranges roughly from 34th to 59th Streets and river to
river, is a center of superlatives. The biggest building, best restaurants, most art
galleries, brightest lights, greatest concentration of big business, largest complex of
theaters and concert houses, best bargain basements, most exclusive couture houses,
and the most specialized services are all here.
(from Fodor’s Budget Travel in America)

a. Use
We use these forms to compare the same quality of different things.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 246
 Gold is softer than copper.
Copper is more durable.
New York is the biggest city in the USA.
The most exclusive fashion stores are here.
We can compare, for example, the softness of gold and copper, or the size of
New York compared to other cities.

NOTE
a. For patterns such as softer than copper, the biggest in the USA,
b. The traditional rule is that we use a comparative (softer, more durable) for two
items, and we use the superlative (biggest, most exclusive) for more than two.
But in informal English we often use the superlative to refer to one of only two
items.
Which of these two photos is better/best?

b. Form
1. These are the regular forms.
Comparative Superlative
Short adjective soft softer softest
Long adjective exclusive more exclusive most exclusive

Short adjectives take er/est, and long adjectives take more/most. For rules
about which adjectives count as short and which as long,
NOTE
a. There are some spelling rules for er/est.
No doubling of e: fine finer
Doubling of some consonants: hot hottest
Y changing to i: heavy heavier
b. For less soft, least exclusive,
c. In rather formal English most can mean ‘very’. Compare the most and a most.
Superlative: It’s the most exclusive store in New York.
Degree: It’s a most exclusive store. (=very exclusive)
d. When we compare two qualities, we use more, not er.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 247
 I was more sad than angry.

Here are two other ways of saying the same thing.

I was not so much angry as sad.
I was sad rather than angry.

2. There are a few irregular forms.

Comparative Superlative
good better best
bad worse worst
far farther/further farthest/furthest

The best restaurants are in Manhattan.

The weather is getting worse.
NOTE
a. The adjectives well (= in good health) and ill take these irregular forms.
I feel a lot better now. She looks worse today.
c. Position
A comparative or superlative adjective can come in the same position as other
adjectives.
Attributive: a softer metal the most specialized services.
Predicative: Gold is softer. Which building is tallest?

We usually put the before a superlative adjective.

Jupiter is the biggest planet.
Jupiter is (the) biggest.

d. Long and short adjectives

In general, short adjectives take er/est while long ones take more/most. One syllable
adjectives count as short and three-syllable adjectives count as ling. Most two-syllable
adjectives count as long but not all of them.

1. One-syllable adjectives (e.g. soft, tall)

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 248
 These take er/est (softer, softest). Exceptions are adjectives in ed (e.g.
pleased,bored) and the adjectives real, right, and wrong.
The film made the story seem more real.

Some one-syllable adjectives of abstract meaning take either er/est or more/most,

e.g. clear, free, keen, safe, sure, true, wise.
I wish I felt surer/more sure about what I’m doing.
2. Two-syllable adjectives (e.g. useful, happy)
The following take more/most (more useful, most useful)
Ending in ful: careful, helpful, hopeful, peaceful, useful, etc
Ending in less: helpless, useless, etc
Ending in ing: boring, pleasing, tiring, willing, etc
Ending in ed: amused, annoyed, ashamed, confused, surprised, etc
Some others: afraid, cautious, certain, correct, eager, exact, famous, foolish,
formal, frequent, mature, modern, normal, recent

The following take either er/est or more/most: able, common, cruel, feeble,
gentle, handsome, narrow, pleasant, polite, simple, sincere, stupid, tired

Two-syllable adjectives ending in y usually take er/est (happier, happiest),

although more/most is possible. Some examples: dirty, easy, empty, funny,
happy, heavy, hungry, lovely, lucky, pretty, silly, thirsty, tidy.

NOTE
Happy etc can still take er/est, even with a negative prefix: unhappier,
untidiest.
Also: unpleasantest/most unpleasant.
3. Adjectives of three or more syllabus (e.g. difficult, magnificent)
These always take more/most (more difficult, most difficult).

4. Overview
Always er/est: Most of one-syllable, e.g. small
Usually er/est: Two syllabus ending in y, e.g. lucky
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 249
 Either er/est Some of one syllable, e.g. clear, true
or more/most: Some of two syllables, e.g. narrow, common
Always more/most: One syllabus ending in ed, e.g. pleased
Most of two syllables, e.g. careful, boring
Three or more syllables, e.g. expensive, magnificent
e. Some special forms
1. Farther/further and farthest/furthest
These words express distance. We use them as adjectives and adverbs.
The farthest/furthest moon is 13 million kilometers from Saturn.
I can’t walk any farther/further.

Further (but not further) can express quantity.

Let’s hope there are no further problems. (=no more problems)

2. Older/elder and oldest/eldest

We use elder and eldest mainly to talk about ages in a family. They go before the
noun.
Have you got an older/elder brother?
The oldest/eldest daughter married a pop singer.

3. Latest/last
Latest means ‘furthest ahead in time’ or ‘newest’.
What’s the latest time we can leave and still catch the train?
This jacket is the latest fashion.

Last means ‘before’ or ‘final’.

I had my hair cut last week.
This is the last time I lend anyone my car.
4. Nearest and next
Nearest means the shortest distance away. Next refers to one of a sequence of
things coming one after the other.
Where is the nearest phone box? (=closest, least far)
We have to get out at the next stop. (=the stop after this)
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 250
 2. The comparative and superlative of adverbs
a. Some adverbs have the same form as adjectives. They take care er/est.
You’ll have to work harder if you want to pass the exam.
Let’s see who can shoot the straightest.
Tim got to work a few minutes earlier than usual.
NOTE
Soon also takes er/est.
If we all help, we’ll get the job finished sooner.

b. There are a few irregular forms.

Comparative Superlative
well better best
badly worse worst
far farther/further farthest/furthest
I find these pills work best.
My tooth was aching worse than ever.

c. Other adverbs take more/most. This includes almost all adverbs in ly.
You’ll have to draw the graph more accurately than that.
The first speaker presented his case the most convincingly.
I wish we could meet more often.

NOTE
Some adverbs can be with or without ly.
I got the bike fairly cheap/cheaply.
Such adverbs have two different comparative and superlative forms.
Two could get one cheaper/more cheaply secondhand.

3. More, most, less, least, fewer and fewest

We can use these words to compare quantities.

Plural Uncountable
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 251
 more (= a larger number) more (= a larger amount)
You’ve got more cassettes than me. They play more music at weekends.
most (= the largest number) most (= the largest amount)
You’ve got the most cassettes of This station plays the most music.
anyone I know.
fewer (= a smaller number) less (= a smaller number)
I buy fewer cassettes these days. There’s less music on the radio at weekends.
fewest (= the smallest number) least (= the smallest amount)
You’ve got the fewest cassettes of This station plays the least music.
anyone I know.

NOTE
The rule is that we use fewer/fewest with a plural noun.
There are fewer cars on the road in winter.
But less/least with a plural noun is common, especially in informal speech.
There are less cars on the road in winter.
It is safer for the learner to avoid this usage.

4. Patterns expressing a comparison

MOTELS IN USA
Many motels are every bit as elegant, comfortable, and well-equipped as the most
modern hotels. Many have bars, fine restaurants and coffee shops for casual meals
and breakfast. If the motel does not have a restaurant, there are always restaurants
nearby. Most rooms are furnished with television. Even less expensive motels often
have a swimming pool. The price for rooms in motels is usually slightly less than for
hotels.
(from USA Travel Information)

a. More, as and less

We can say that something is greater than, equal to or less than something
else.
Most hotels are more comfortable than motels.
Some motels are as comfortable as hotels.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 252
 Some motels are less comfortable than a modern hotel.

NOTE
We can make comparisons with same, like, similar and different.
Motels are the same as hotels. Motels are like hotels.
Motels are similar to hotels. Motels are nor very different from hotels.
The following words can also express a comparison.
Paris is my favorite city. (=I like it best.)
Wood is superior to preferable to plastic as a material. (= better)
The car’s speed exceeded ninety miles an hour. (= was more than)

b. Less and least

1. Less and least are the opposites of more and most.
Motels are usually less expensive than hotels.
A motel will cost you less.
The subway is the least expensive way to get around New York.
We go out less often these days.

NOTE
We use less with both long and short adjectives.
It’s cheaper/less expensive. It’s more expensive/less cheap.

2. Whether we say, for example, warmer or less cold depends on our point of view.
It was cold in the house, but it was less cold than outside.
We choose less cold here because we are talking about how cold the house was, not
how warm it was. We can express the same thing using a negative sentence with as.
It was cold, but it wasn’t as cold as outside.
In informal English this pattern is more usual. Less + adjective can be a little
formal.

c. As and so
1. We use a positive statement with as to say that things are equal.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 253
 Many motels are as comfortable as hotels.
My sister is as tall as me.
NOTE
a. We can use as in idiomatic phrases.
as hard as iron (= very hard) as light as a feather (=very light)
b. Note this use with numbers and measurements.
The temperature is often as high as 40 degrees.
(= The temperature is often 40 degrees, which is very high.)

2. In a negative statement we can use either as or so.

Some motels are not as comfortable/not so comfortable as a good hotel.
The place isn’t as crowded/isn’t so crowded in winter.
I don’t drink as much/so much coffee as you do.
Not as/so comfortable means ‘less comfortable’.

3. In attributive position, as + adjective goes before a/an.

This isn’t as comfortable a hotel as the last one we stayed in.
Such replaces so in a phrase with a/an.
This isn’t such a comfortable hotel as the last one we stayed in.

4. We use as (not so) with the second item in the comparison. After as we can use
phrase
or clause.
Copper isn’t as valuable as gold.
I came as quickly as I could.
No one scored as many points as Laura did.
d. Than
After a comparative we can use than with a phrase or clause.
Gold is softer than copper, NOT Gold is softer as copper.
Going out alone is more difficult for women than for men.
The motel was less expensive than I had expected.
Flying is a lot quicker than going by train.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 254
 There were more people in town than usual.

e. Pronouns after as and than

A pronoun directly after as or than has the object form unless there is a verb after it.
I’m not as tall as him/as tall as he is.
The other teams played better than us/better than we did.
NOTE I’m not as tall he is formal and old-fashioned.

f. Comparisons without as or than

We can leave out as/than + phrase or clause if the meaning is clear without it.
I liked the last hotel we stayed in. this one isn’t so comfortable.
Gold isn’t very suitable for making tools. Copper is much harder.
It’s more difficult to find your way in the dark.

g. Patterns with the superlative

After a superlative we often use a phrase of time or place, an of-phrase or a
relative clause.
It’s going to be the most exciting pop festival ever.
Which is the tallest building in the world?
Titan is the largest satellite of all.
It’s the most marvelous pointing I’ve ever seen.
Peter is the least aggressive person I know
NOTE
a. An of-phrase can come in front position for emphasis.
Of all Saturn’s moons, Titan is the largest.
b. We sometimes use a pattern with one of/some of.
This building is one of the tallest in the world.

h. Much bigger etc

We can use an adverb of degree in patterns expressing a comparison.
Gold is much softer than copper.
This is by far the best method.
Many motels are every bit as/just as elegant as the most modern hotels.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 255
 I’ll need a lot more paper.

5. Special patterns with the comparative

a. We use this pattern with and to express a continuing increase.
The plant grew taller and taller.
The roads are getting more and more crowded.
There’s more and more traffic all the time.
The problem is becoming worse and worse.

b. We use this pattern with the and a comparative to say that a change in one
thing goes with a change in another.
The longer this journey (is), the more expensive the ticket (is).
The further you travel, the more you pay.
The older you get, the more difficult it becomes to find a job.

III. ADVERBIALS
A. Introduction to adverbials
In this real conversation Liz is telling a friend how she and Tony were stopped by the
police.

STOPPED BY THE POLICE

Liz: It was at about eleven o’clock at night, and at that sort of time the police are
always looking for people who’ve been drinking. And I can remember very well
that
we were in a hurry to get home because Catherine was with a babysitter, but she
wasn’t at home, she was in someone else’s house, and we wanted to get back
before
they were ready to go to bed. Do you remember?
Tony: We’d been to the cinema.
Liz: Mhm. And I can remember….
Tony: Hadn’t had a drink for days.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 256
 Liz: No. I can remember distinctly that you were going very very slowly as you saw
the
police car in front of you, and then you said in a very impatient fashion. ‘Oh,
they’re
doing this on purpose. They’re going very slowly. I will overtake them’. You
overtook
them, and sure enough they thought that that was worth stopping you for. So they
did.
Tony: So they got out, and they inspected the car thoroughly in a very
officipus manner.
(from M. Underwood and P. Barr Listeners)

a. An adverbial can have these forms.

Adverb phrase: You were going very slowly.
We wanted to get back.
Prepositional phrase: Catherine wasn’t at home.
You saw the police car in front of you.
Noun phrase: We wanted to get home.
It happened last week.

b. Sometimes an adverbial is necessary to complete a sentence.

Catherine was with a babysitter. We’d been to the cinema.

But very often the adverbial is an extra element.

I can remember very well. You saw the police car in front of you.

Putting in an extra adverbial adds something to the meaning. For example, it can
tell us how, when or where something happened.

c. An adverbial can modify different parts of the sentence.

The car in front of us was a police car.
You were getting really impatient.
They were going very slowly.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 257
 They inspected the car thoroughly.
Then you decided to overtake.
Here the adverbials add information about the noun car, the adjective
impatient, the adverb slowly, the action inspected the car and the clause you
decided.

B. Adverb forms
1 Some adverbs are unrelated to other words, e.g. always, soon, very, perhaps.
But many adverbs are formed from an adjective + ly, e.g. quick quickly,
certain certainly.

NOTE
There are some spelling rules for adverbs in ly.
Y changing to i: easy easily
Adjectives ending in consonant + le: probable probably
Adjectives ending in ic: magic magically
2. We cannot add ly to adjective which already ends in ly. Instead we can either
use a prepositional phrase with manner/way, fashion, or we can use another
adverbs.
We received a friendly greeting. They greeted us in a friendly manner.
NOT friendlily
That isn’t very likely. That probably won’t happen.

Some adjectives in ly are friendly, lively, lovely, silly, ugly, cowardly, lonely,
costly, likely.
NOTE
Some adjectives ending in ed have no adverb form.
The woman stared in astonishment, NOT astonishedly.
But those ending in ted can take an ly ending.
The crowd shouted excitedly.

3. Some adverbs have the same form as adjectives.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 258
 Adjective Adverb
Louise caught the fast train. The train was going quite fast.
We didn’t have a long wait. We didn’t have to wait long.
I had an early night. I went to bed early.

Other adverbs like this are walk straight, sit still and bend low. For hard,
hardly, late, lately, etc.

4. Sometimes the adverb can be with or without ly. It is more informal to leave
out ly.
You can buy cassettes cheap/cheaply in the market.
Do you have to talk so loud/loudly?
Get there as quick/quickly as you can.
Go slow/slowly here.

Cheap(ly), loud(ly), quick(ly), and slow(ly) are the most common. Others are
direct(ly), tight(ly) and fair(ly).

NOTE
a. We use the form without ly only in common expressions, e.g. talk so loud, go slow,
fly direct, play fair. We use ly with longer or less common expressions.
Do you have to rustle that newspaper so loudly?
We need to take action quickly.
b. Right and wrong are adverbs of manner, but rightly and wrongly express a comment.
I’ll try to do it right this time.
Helen decided rightly to call the police.
c. First and last are both adjectives and adverbs.
Karen took first place/came first in the race.

Firstly and lastly are linking adverbs.

First/Firstly, I’d like to thank you all for coming.

5. There are some pairs such as hard and hardly which have different meanings.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 259
 You’ve all worked hard. I’ve got hardly any money.
(hardly any = almost no)
There’s a bank quite near. We’ve nearly finished. (= almost)
I often stay up late. I’ve been unwell lately. (= recently)
The plane flew high above the clouds. The theory is highly controversial. (=
very)
Submarines can go very deep. Mike feels very deeply about this.
Airline staff travel free. (=without The prisoners can move around
freely. (= uncontrolled)
This ear hurts the most. We mostly stay in. (= usually)
paying)

6. Hourly, daily, etc are formed from hour, day, week, month, and year. They are
both adjectives and adverbs.
It’s a monthly magazine. It comes out monthly.

7. Good is an adjective, and well is its adverb.

Roger is a good singer, isn’t he?
Roger sings well, doesn’t he? NOT He sings good.

But well is also an adjective meaning ‘in good health’.

I was ill, but I’m well/I’m all right now.
How are you? ~ Very well/Fine, thank you.

NOTE We use well in expressions such as well organized, well deserved, and
well known.

C. The position of adverbials

The position of an adverbial depends on what it modifies. It can modify a word or
phrase or a whole clause. Its position also depends on what type of adverbial it is and
whether it is a single word or a phrase.
1. Modifying a noun, adjective or adverb
a. An adverbial which modifies a noun usually goes after it.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 260
 The shop on the corner is closed.
Who’s the girl with short hair?
Those people outside are getting wet.

b. An adverb which modifies an adjective or adverb usually goes before it.

That’s very king of you. We heard the signal fairly clearly.

2. Front position, mid position and end position

When an adverbial modifies a verb or a whole clause, there are three main
places we can put it.
Front: Really, I can’t say.
Mid: I can’t really say.
End: I can’t say, really.

Sometimes we can also put an adverbial after the subject.

I really can’t say.

3. Front position
Sure enough, the police car stopped us.
Just hold on a moment.
In the end our efforts will surely meet with success.

Front position is at the beginning of a clause. Most types of adverbial can go

here. We often put an adverbial in front position when it relates to what has
gone before.
You were getting impatient. And then you decided to overtake.

NOTE
A prepositional phrases can sometimes be the subject.
Along that path in the quickest way. After lunch is usually a quiet time.

4. Mid position
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 261
 The police are always looking for people at this time.
This stereo is definitely faulty.
I usually enjoy math lessons.

Mid position is after an auxiliary verb, after the ordinary verb be on its own, or
before a simple-tense verb.

(Auxiliary)
Subject (be on its own) Adverb (Verb)
It doesn’t often rain in the Sahara.
We ‘ve just booked our tickets.
The news will soon be out of date.
You were probably right.
You probably made the right decision.
I always get the worst jobs.

Most types of short adverbial can go here, especially adverbs of frequency

(often), but not phrases.

NOT I every time get the worst jobs.

a. In a question there is inversion of subject and auxiliary.
Have you just looked your tickets?Why do I always get the worst jobs?
b. If there are two auxiliaries, then mid positions is usually after the first one.
We’ve just been queuing for tickets. The shops will soon be closing.

But adverbs of manners and some adverbs of degree go after the second auxiliary.
We’ve been patiently queuing for tickets. You could have completely spoilt
everything.
c. We sometimes put an adverb after the subject and before the verb phrase. This
happens especially with a negative (probably doesn’t) or when there is stress
(really are).
It probably doesn’t matter very much.
You really are serious, aren’t you?
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 262
 An adverb also goes before have to, used to, and ought to.
I never have to wait long for a bus.

Sometimes the position can affect the meaning. Compare these sentences.
They deliberately didn’t leave the heating on. (They left it off on purpose.)
They didn’t deliberately leave the heating on. (They left it on by purpose.)
5. End position
a. I hadn’t had a drink for days.
The police were driving very slowly.
They’re doing this on purpose.
Most types of adverbial can come here, especially prepositional phrases.
b. If there is an object, then the adverbial usually goes after it.
I wrapped the parcel carefully, NOT I wrapped carefully the parcel.
We’ll finish the job next week, NOT We’ll finish next week the job.

But a short adverbial can go before a long object.

I wrapped carefully all the glasses and ornaments.

Here the adverb of manner can also go in mid position.

I carefully wrapped all the glasses and ornaments.
c. We often put an adverbial in end position when it is new and important
information.
There was a police car in front of us. It was going very slowly.

NOTE
When there are two clauses, the position of the adverb can affect meaning.
They agreed immediately that the goods would be replaced. (an immediate

agreement)
They agreed that the goods would be replaced immediately. (an immediate
replacement)

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 263
 6. Order in end position
a. Sometimes there is more than one adverbial in end position. Usually a shorter
adverbial
goes before a longer one.
Sam waited impatiently outside the post office.
We sat indoors most of the afternoon.
They inspected the car thoroughly in a very officious manner.
b. When there is a close link in meaning between a verb and adverbial, then the
adverbial
goes directly after the verb. For example, we usually put an adverbial of place next
to
go, come, etc.
I go to work by bus. Charles came home late.
c. Phrases of time and place can often go in either order.
There was an accident last night on the by-pass.
There was an accident on the by-pass last night.

NOTE
A smaller place usually comes before a larger one.
They live in a bungalow near Coventry.

Manner, time and place usually come before frequency.

I can find my way around quite, easily, usually.
Sarah goes up early occasionally.

In more careful English, the adverb of frequency would come in position.

I can usually find my way around quite easily
When a truth, comment or linking adverb comes in end position, it is usually
last, a kind of afterthought.
Phil’s had to stay late at work, perhaps.
Someone handed the money in at the police station, incredibly.
Wendy is a member. She doesn’t go to the club very often, however.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 264
D. Adverbs of manner
1. Adjectives and adverbs
a. Look at these examples.
Adjective Adverb
Kevin had a quick snack. He ate quickly.
Kate is fluent in Russian. She speaks Russian fluently.
Think of a sensible reply. Try to reply sensibly.

An adjective modifies a noun (snack). An adverb of manner modifies a verb (ate).

Most
adverbs of manner are formed from an adjective +ly. For adverbs without ly.

b. Compare the different types of verb.

Linking verb + adjective Action verb + adverb
The inspector was polite. She listened politely. NOT She listened polite.

Linking verbs are be, seem, become, look, feel, etc. Some verbs can be either linking
verbs or action verbs.
Linking verb +adjective Action verb + adverb
The speaker looked nervous. He looked nervously round the room.
The milk smelled funny. Dave smelled the milk suspiciously.
The atmosphere grew tense. The plants grew rapidly.

2. Prepositional phrases
We can often use a prepositional phrase to express manner.
Handle carefully/with care. They were doing it deliberately/on purpose.
They inspected the car officiously/in an officious manner.

NOTE
We can often use an adjective or adverb in the prepositional phrase.
It must be banned with great care.
They inspected the car in an extremely officious manner.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 265
 3. Position
a. We put an adverbial of manner mainly in end position. These are real examples
from stories.
‘I didn’t know whether to tell you or not,’ she said anxiously.
The sun still shone brightly on the quiet street.
We continued our labors in silence.
NOTE
An adverb of manner can modify an adjective.
The teams were quietly confident. The dog lay peacefully asleep.
b. The adverbial can sometimes come in front position for emphasis.
Without another word, he walked slowly away up the strip.

E. Place and time

1. Position
a. Adverbials of place and time often go in end position.
The match will be played at Villa Park.
The President made the comment to reporters yesterday.
A Norwegian ferry was being repaired last night after running aground in
the
Thames.
The office is closed for two weeks.

b. They can also go in front position.

I’ve got two meetings tomorrow. And on Thursday I have to go to London.

c. Some short adverbials of time can go in mid position.

I’ve just seen Debbie. We’ll soon be home.
These include now, then, just (= a short time ago), recently, soon, at once,
immediately,
finally, since, already, still, and no longer.

d. An adverbial of place or time can modify a noun.

The radiator in the hall is leaking.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 266
 Exports last year broke all records.

2. Yet, still and already

a. We use yet for something that is expected.
Have you replied to the letter yet? ~ No, not yet.
I got up late. I haven’t had breakfast yet.
Yet comes at the end of a question or negative statement.

NOTE
We can use yet in mid position, but it is a little formal.
We have not yet reached a decision on the matter.

b. We use still for something going on longer than expected. In positive statements
and
questions it goes in mid position.
I got up late. I’m still having breakfast.
Does Carl still ride that old motor-bike he had at college?

In negative statements still comes after the subject.

The child still hasn’t learnt to read.
This is more emphatic than. The child hasn’t learnt to read yet.

NOTE
Still can go after a negative auxiliary when we express surprise. Compare
these sentences.
I still don’t feel well. (= I still feel ill.)
You don’t still feel sick, do you? (= I am surprised that you still feel sick.)

c. We use already for something happening sooner than expected. We use it mainly in
mid position in positive statements and questions.
I got up early. I’ve already had breakfast.
Have you already replied to the letter? ~ Yes, I know. ~ That was quick. It only
Came yesterday.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 267
 Already in end position has more emphasis.
Good heavens! It’s lunch time already.
Have you typed the whole report already?

NOTE
Already can go after the subject and before a stressed auxiliary.
I already have typed the report, I tell you.

3. No longer, anymore and any longer

a. We use no longer for something coming to an end. It goes in mid position.
Mrs. Hicks no longer works at the town hall.
No longer is a little formal. In informal speech we use any more. It goes in end
position
in a negative sentence.
Barbara doesn’t work at the town hall any more.

b. We often use any longer in a negative sentence for something that is about to end.
I’m not going to wait any longer.

4. Long and far

a. We normally use the adverbs long and far only in questions and negative
statements.
Have you been waiting long? It isn’t far from here to the motorway.
In positive statements we use a long time/way.
I had to wait a long time/wait ages. It’s a long way to Vladivostok.

b. But we use long and far after too, so and as, and with enough.
The speech went too long.
I’m annoyed because I’ve had to wait so long/such a long time.
Let’s go back now. We’ve walked far enough.

NOTE
We can also use the comparative and superlative forms in positive statements.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 268
 The journey takes longer in the rush hour. You threw the ball furthest.

5. After
We do not often use after on its own as an adverb.
We all went to the cinema and then afterwards to a pizza restaurant.
The talk lasted half an hour. Then/ After that there was a discussion.
But we can say the day/week after.
I sent the form off, and I got a reply the week after/a week later.

F. Adverbs of frequency
1. An adverb of frequency usually goes in mid position.
The bus doesn’t usually stop here. I can never open these packets.
It’s always cold up here. I often get up in the night.
Some adverbs of frequency are always; normally, generally, usually; often,
frequently; sometimes, occasionally; seldom, rarely; never.
NOTE
a. The adverb can sometimes go after the subject and before a negative auxiliary.
Compare these sentences.
I don’t often have breakfast. (= I seldom have breakfast.)
I often don’t have breakfast. (= I often go without breakfast.)
Sometimes goes before a negative auxiliary.
You sometimes can’t get a table here.
b. Seldom and rarely are a little formal. In informal speech we use not often.
I don’t often play cards.
c. Never is a negative word.
I’ve never felt so embarrassed in my life. Will you never learn?
We use ever mainly in questions.
Have you ever done any ballroom dancing? ~ No, never.
But we can also use ever with negative words.
I haven’t ever felt so embarrassed.
You hardly ever buy me flowers.
Ever can add emphasis to the negative.
No one ever said that to me before.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 269
 Nothing ever happens in this place.
I never ever want to see that awful man again
We can also use ever in conditions and comparisons.
If you ever feel like a chat, just drop in.
James swam faster than he’d ever done before.
If ever can go before the subject.
If ever you feel like a chat, just drop in.
We do not normally use ever in positive statements.
I always have lots to do. NOT I ever have lots to do.

2. Normally, generally, usually, frequently, sometimes and occasionally also go in front or

end position.
Normally tip taxi-drivers. My sister comes to see me sometimes
Often, seldom and rarely can go in end position, especially with e.g. very or quite.
Doctors get called out at night quite often.
A lot (= often) goes in end position.
We go out a lot at weekends.

NOTE
Always, never and often in front position are emphatic.
Always the ghost appeared at the same time.

We can use always and never in instructions.

Never try to adjust the machine while it is switched on.

3. We can also use a phrase with every, most or some to express frequency.
These phrases can go in front or end position.
Every summer we all go sailing together.
The dog has to have a walk every day.
The postman calls most days.
Some evenings we don’t have the television on at all.
We can also use once, twice, three times etc.
The committee meets once a month.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 270
 Two tablets to be taken three times a day.
Paul has been married several times.
NOTE
Compare often and several times.
We’ve often been skiing. (= many times over a long period)
We’ve been skiing several times. (= perhaps four or five times)

4. The adverbs daily (= every day), weekly etc go in end position.

Are you paid weekly or monthly?

G. Adverbs of degree
1. Modifying an adjective or adverb
a. We can use an adverb of degree before some adjectives and adverbs.
+ Adjective: It’s very cold. I’m so tired.
You’re absolutely right. These are rather expensive.
We’re a bit busy today. It wasn’t at all interesting.
+ Adverb: I come here quite often. I saw her fairly recently.
We hardly ever go out. He agreed somewhat reluctantly.

Here are some common adverbs of degree.

Full degree: completely, totally, absolutely, entirely, quite
Large degree: very, extremely, really, awfully, terribly
Medium degree: rather, fairly, quite, pretty, somewhat
Small degree: a little, a bit, slightly
Negative: hardly, scarcely, at all
Others: so, as; too; more, most, less, least

We can also use a fraction or percentage.

The bottle is only half full.
The forecast was eighty percent accurate.

NOTE
a. We use completely, totally, absolutely etc with words expressing a full or
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 271
 large degree.
This tin opener is completely useless. (useless = absolutely no use)
We are absolutely delighted at the news. (delighted = very pleased)

We do not normally use very or extremely with these words.

It’s very unsatisfactory. NOT It’s very useless.
We were extremely pleased. NOT We were extremely delighted.

Some words that do not normally take very or extremely are: amazed,
amazing, appalled, appalling, awful, complete, delighted, dreadful,
essential, false, fascinated, horrible, ideal, impossible, incredible,
magnificent, marvelous, perfect, terrible, terrific, useless.
b. After a phrase with very we can put indeed for extra emphasis.
It’s very cold indeed today.
c. We often use very with a negative.
These photos aren’t very good.
This is more usual than These photos aren’t good or These photos are bad.
d. Instead of really we can use real in informal speech, especially in
American English.
It’s real cold today.
e. Pretty and a bit are informal.
f. Somewhat, a little, a bit and slightly have an unfavorable sense.
The carriage was somewhat crowded.
I felt a bit sick.
But we can use them with comparatives in a favorable sense.
I felt a bit better/somewhat more cheerful.
g. At all can also go in end position.
It wasn’t interesting at all.
h. In informal English we can use that instead of so in a negative sentence.
No, they don’t own an aeroplane. They aren’t that rich.
i. We can use much, far or rather to modify too.
This coat is much too big for me.
b. Enough comes after the adjective or adverb it modifies.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 272
 Are you warm enough?
Steve didn’t react quickly enough.
Compare too and enough.
It’s too small (for me)./It isn’t big enough (for me).

NOTE
Compare enough as adverb and as quantifier.
I’m not rich enough./I haven’t enough money.

2. Modifying a comparative adjective or adverb

This new sofa is much nicer than the old one. NOT very nicer.
Come on. Try a bit harder.
The alternative route was no quicker.

Before a comparative we can use (very) much, a lot; rather, somewhat; a little, a bit,
slightly; three times etc.

3. Modifying a superlative
It was just about the nicest holiday I could have imagined.
We offer easily the best value/by far the best value.

NOTE
The adverb can sometimes come after the phrase with a superlative.
We offer the best value by far.

4. So/such, quite and too

We can use most adverbs of degree with an attributive adjective.
that very tall girl my fairly low score a rather nice restaurant
But after a/an we do not normally use so or quite.
She’s such a tall girl. NOT a so tall girl.
It’s quite an old book. (a quite old book is less usual)
Too or as and the adjective go before a/an.
You’ve cut too short a piece. NOT a too short piece

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 273
 I know just as quick a way. NOT a just as quick way
We can use so in the same way, although the pattern with such is more usual.
I don’t like to criticize so famous an artist.
I don’t like to criticize such a famous artist.

NOTE
a. We can use rather in both patterns.
We had a rather long wait/rather a long wait.
b. We can use such and rather + a/an + noun without an adjective.
That man is such an idiot. It’s rather a pity you won’t be here.
We can also use a bit of.
Sorry. The flat’s in a bit of a mess.
Quite in this pattern means something large or special.
We had quite a wait. That was quite a party.
The meaning is the same as That was some party.

5. Quite and rather

a. Stress
In these examples with quite, the adjective is stressed.
It’s quite ‘warm today. (It’s warmer than expected.)
Your friends are quite ‘rich. (They’ve got a lot of money.)
If we stress quite, we limit the force of the adjective.
It’s ‘quite warm. (but not as warm as expected)
Things went ‘quite well. (but not as well as I’d hoped)
NOTE: We do not stress rather.

b. Quite warm/rather cold

When we make a favorable comment, we usually prefer quite to rather.
Quite is unstressed.
It’s quite pleasant here. It was quite a good party.

In unfavorable comments, we usually prefer rather, but quite is possible.

It’s rather/quite depressing here. It was rather/quite a dull party.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 274
 It was rather/quite inconvenient having to change trains twice.
Rather in a favorable comment often means ‘to a surprising or unusual degree’.
I expected the party to the dull, but it was actually rather good.
The test paper was rather easy. (It isn’t usually so easy.)

c. Two meanings of quite

Quite + adjective can express a medium degree or a full degree, depending on the
kind of adjective.

Medium degree: ‘fairly’ Full degree: ‘completely’

The task is quite difficult. The task is quite impossible.
The film was quite good. The film was quite brilliant.
I feel quite tired. I feel quite exhausted.

With adjectives like difficult, we can use different degrees: fairly difficult, a bit
difficult, very difficult, more difficult etc. Adjectives like impossible and brilliant
already mean a full or large degree. An impossible task is completely out of the
question; a brilliant film is very good.

Quite means ‘completely’ before these adjectives:

absurd brilliant disgusting fascinated perfect
alone certain dreadful fascinating ridiculous
amazed dead empty horrible right
amazing delicious extraordinary impossible sure
appalled determined exhausted incredible true
appalling different exhausting magnificent useless
awful disgusted false marvelous wrong

NOTE
a. We can sometimes use fairly etc with some of the adjectives listed above, especially
in informal speech.
The task is fairly impossible. I feel pretty exhausted.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 275
 But quite impossible/exhausted etc always means ‘completely’.
b. Not quite means ‘not completely’
What you said is not quite true.(= almost true)
c. Quite + like/enjoy/want = fairly.
I quite enjoyed the film. It was quite good.

Quite + agree/understand = completely.

I quite agree. You’re quite right.

6. Modifying a preposition
Some adverbs of degree can modify a preposition.
The offices are right in the centre of town.
I’m not very up to date, I’m afraid.
7. Modifying a verb
a. We can use an adverb of degree to modify a verb.
I’m really enjoying myself.
We were rather hoping to have a look round.
The doorman absolutely refused to let us in.
The suitcase was so heavy I could hardly lift it.
In mid position we can use absolutely, completely, totally; just, really; almost,
nearly;
hardly, scarcely; quite, rather.
Absolutely, completely, totally and rather can also go in end position.
I completely forgot the time./I forgot the time completely.
NOTE
The adverb goes before a stressed auxiliary and also sometimes before a negative
auxiliary.
I just don’t know what to do. The driver almost didn’t see the red light.

b. We often use an adverb of degree before a passive participle.

The car was badly damaged in the accident.
Our scheduled was completely disrupted by the changes.
c. Some adverbs go in end position when they modify a verb.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 276
 During the speech my attention wandered a lot.
This tooth aches terribly.
These are a lot, very much; a bit, a little, slightly; somewhat; terribly, awfully;
more,
(the) most.

d. We can use much or very much in a negative sentence or question, but we cannot
use
much on its own in a positive statement.
Negative: I don’t like this sweater much/very much.
Positive: I like this sweater very much. NOT I like this sweater much.

8. Modifying a quantifier
We can use these patterns.
a. very/so/too + many/much/few/little
There were so many people there.
b. such/rather/quite + a lot (of)
There were such a lot of people there.
We’ve had rather a lot of complaints.
c. quite + a few/a bit (of)
We’ve had quite a few complaints.
d. almost/nearly + all/every
Almost all the pudding had been eaten.
e. hardly any
There was hardly any pudding left.
f. a lot/much/a bit/a little/any/no + more/less
Would you like a bit more pudding?
NOTE
We can use much, far or rather to modify too.
You’ve put far too much salt in.

H. Focus and viewpoint

1. Focus adverbials

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 277
 We sometimes use an adverb to focus on a particular word or phrase.
Emily works every day, even on Sundays.
I don’t like alcohol, especially beer.

NOTE
Compare even and also.
Everyone laughed, even the teacher.
(Everyone includes the teacher.)
We’ve invited the whole class, and also the teacher.
(The whole class does not include the teacher.)

2. Only and even

a. In rather formal or careful English we put only and even before the word or phrase
we
want to focus on.
I knew only one of the other guests.
Alan always wears shorts. He wears them even in winter.
But in informal English only and even can be in mid position.
I only knew one of the other guests.
Alan even wears shorts in winter.
We stress the word we want to focus on, e.g. one, winter.
NOTE
a. Only can be an adjective.
Saturday is the only day I can go shopping.
b. We can use the adverb just (= only)
I knew just one of the other guests.
b. When we focus on the subject, we put only and even before it.
Only you would do a silly thing like that. (No one else would.)
Even the experts don’t know the answer.
c. In official written English, e.g. on notices, only comes after the word or phrase it
focuses on.
Waiting limited to 30 minutes only.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 278
 3. Viewpoint adverbials
These express the idea that we are looking at a situation from a particular aspect or
point of view.
Financially, things are a bit difficult at the moment.
Can you manage transport-wise, or do you need a lift?
The building is magnificent from an architectural point of view, but it’s hell to
work in.
As far as insurance is concerned, we can fix that up for you.

NOTE
A viewpoint adverb can also modify an adjective.
The scheme is economically beneficial but environmentally disastrous.

I. Truth adverbs
1. A truth adverb expresses what the speaker knows about the truth of a statement: how
likely
it is to be true, or to what degree it is true.
Perhaps/Maybe Mandy has missed the bus.
You’ve certainly/undoubtedly made a good start.
I agree with you basically. Service isn’t included, presumably.
Clearly, the matter is urgent. The boxer allegedly took drugs.

Most of these adverbs can go in front, mid or end position. Certainly, definitely and
probably usually go in mid position. But in a negative sentence we put a truth adverb
after the subject rather than after the auxiliary.
You certainly haven’t wasted any time.
Service presumably isn’t included.

2. We can also use a prepositional phrase.

The whole thing is ridiculous in my opinion.
Of course I’ll pay you back.
We get on quite well together on the whole.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 279
 3. We can also use a clause with I.
I think the whole thing is ridiculous.
Someone’s fused the lights. I expect.
I’m sure you’ve made a mistake.

J. Comment adverbs
1. We use this kind of adverb to make a comment on what we are saying.
Luckily no one was killed. (= It was lucky that no one was killed.)
The newspaper wasn’t interested in the story, surprisingly.
I’m afraid/Unfortunately we didn’t win anything.
2. We can also use an adverb to comment on someone’s behavior.
Dick wisely didn’t interfere. (= It was wise of Dick not to interfere.)
Compare the adverbs of comment and manner.
I stupidly left the car unlocked. (= It was stupid of me.)
The man stared stupidly. (= in a stupid manner)
3. We can use a phrase with to for someone’s feelings about something.
To my surprise, the newspaper wasn’t interested in the story.
To Phil’s delight, his plan proved successful.

4. We can comment on why we are saying something.

Honestly./To be honest, I think you’re making the wrong decision.

K. Linking adverbs
1. A linking adverb relates to the previous clause or sentence. It most often goes in front
position, but it can go in mid or end position. Here are some real examples.
But the baby does not just grow bigger and heavier. Its shape and body
proportions also change as it grows up.
When Beethoven was fourteen, he was forced to give lessons to support his
parents.
However, he still found time to take a few violin lessons, and he went on
composing.
If you pay the bill in full within 25 days you won’t be charged interest.
Otherwise you are charged interest on any balance outstanding.
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 280
 Some other linking adverbs are as well, too, in addition, furthermore; nevertheless, on
the other hand; therefore, consequently, as a result; likewise; instead. They have
similar meaning to conjunction such as and, but, so and if.

2. Here are some other ways of relating one clause or sentence to another.
Ordering: There are two reasons. Firstly, I’m not interested, and
secondly, I haven’t got the time.
Summing up: In conclusion, I’d like to say a few words about future
prospect.
Rephrasing: The matter is under consideration. In other words, they’re
thinking about it.
Correcting: I’ll see you tomorrow then. Or rather on Monday.
Giving examples: We’ve got lots of things we could sell. There’s the car, for
example.
Picking up a topic: I think I’ll have the sausages. ~ Talking of sausages, did you
know there’s a barbecue on Saturday?
Changing the subject: I had a lovely lunch. ~ Good. By the way, where did you put
that file?
Supporting a statement: I think I’d better be going. It’s past midnight, after all.
Dismissing something: I don’t know whether we did the right thing. Anyway, it doesn’t
matter now.
Comparing: The government sold the telephone service to private investors.
Gas and electricity were privatized in the same way.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 281
 CHAPTER 7
PREPOSITIONS

A. Introduction to prepositions
1. A preposition usually comes before a noun phrase.
Into the building at two o’clock without a coat
Some prepositions can also come before an adverb.
Until tomorrow through there at once
We can also use some prepositions before a gerund.
We’re thinking of moving house.
NOT we’re thinking of to move house.
We cannot use a preposition before a that-clause.
We’re hoping for a win./we’re hoping (that) we’ll win.
NOT We’re hoping for that we’ll win.
But we can use a preposition before a wh-clause.
I’d better make a list of what we need.
NOTE: for the difference between the preposition to and the to-infinitive

2. The preposition and its object form a prepositional phrase.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 282
 Preposition + Noun phrase
Prepositional phrase: towards the sitting sun
behind you
The prepositional phrase functions as an adverbial.
They walked towards the sitting sun.
On Saturday there’s going to be a disco.
It sometimes comes after a noun.
The disco on Saturday has been cancelled.

3. We can modify a preposition.

Almost at the end right in front of me halfway up the hill
All over the floor just off the motorway directly after your lesson

4. In some clauses a preposition goes at the end.

Wh-question: Who did you go to the party with?
Infinitive clauses: I’ve got a tape for you to listen to.
Passive: War reporters sometimes get shot at.
Relative clause: That’s the article I to do you about.

5. Some prepositions can also be adverbs.

Preposition: I waited for max outside the bank.
We haven’t seen Julia since last summer.
There was no lift. We had to walk up the stairs.
Adverb: Max went into the bank and I waited outside.
We saw Julia last summer, but we haven’t seen her since.
There was no lift. We had to walk up.
A verb + adverb like walk up, get in is a phrasal verb.

6. Some preposition of time can also be conjunctions.

Preposition: We must be ready before their arrival.
Conjunction: We must be ready before they arrive.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 283
B. Prepositions of place
1. Basic meanings

The road goes through a

tunnel. The car is going
in/into the tunnel. The
lorry is coming out of the
There are some people tunnel.
in/inside the café. There’s a picture overt
above the door. There’s a
small table under/bellow
the window.
The man is waiting
outside the café. She’s going up the steps,
and he’s coming down
the
steps.
There’s a television on She’s taking the food off
the table. There’s a photo the trolley and putting it
on top of the television. on/onto the selves.

There’s a dog under

(neath) the table.
to the university. The bus is in front
of the car. The lorry
is behind the car.
The car is between
the bus and the
lorry.

The bus is at the

bus stop. It’s going
from the city centre
Grammar 1
English Department
Page 284
 The President is
standing among
his bodyguards. There’s a hill beyond the The man is leaning
They are all church. against the wall.
round/around (=on the other side of)
him.

The man is sitting next

to/by/beside the woman.
The lorry is travelling Their table is close/to
away from York and near the door.
towards Hull.

The woman is walking The man is on the

along the pavement past pavement opposite the
the supermarket. bank. The bank is across
the road.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 285
 a. We use of only with on top of, out of and in front of. NOT inside of NOT off of and
NOT behind of, although outside of is possible,
b. Two other prepositions of place are throughout and within. They are a little formal.
The epidemic spread throughout the country/all over the country. (=to all
parts of)
Delivery is free within a ten-mile radius. (=inside)
c. Beneath is rather literary.
From the balloon we could see the town far below/beneath us.
d. Around and about mean ‘in different directions’ or ‘in different places’.
We’re going to drive around/about the country visiting different places.
There were piles of old magazines lying around/about the flat.

2. Position and movement

a. Most prepositions of place say where something is or where it is going.
Position: there was a barrier across the road.
Movement: the boy ran across the road.
b. At usually expresses position, and to expresses movement.
Position: we were at the café.
Movement: we went to the café.
c. As a general rule, in and on express position, and into and onto express movement.
Position: we were sitting in the café. She stood on the balcony.
Movement: we went into the café. She walked onto the balcony.
NOTE
We sometimes use in and on for movement, especially in informal English.
We went in the café.
But sometimes the choice of preposition depends of the meaning.
We walked on the beach (for half an hour).
We walked (from the car park) onto the beach.
After lay, place, put and sit we do not usually use into or onto.
They laid the body on blanket. Tom sat down in the armchair.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 286
 3. Other meanings
a. Some prepositions of place can also express time.
Lost of people work from nine o’clock to five.
b. Preposition of place can also have more abstract meanings.
I’m really into modern jazz. (= interested in)
Ian comes from Scotland. (= He’s Scottish./He live in Scotland.)
The show was above/beyond criticism. (= to good to be criticized)
We are working towards a united states of Europe. (= working to create)
The party is right behind its leader. (= supporting)
Cities are among the most successful teams in the country. (= one of)
C. Prepositions of place: more details
1. At, on and in
Compare:
She’s at her desk. It’s on the desk. they’re in the drawer.
a. At is one dimensional. We use it when we see something as a point in space.
The car was waiting the lights.
There’s someone at the door.
We also use at + event
We met at the Daphne’s party, didn’t we?
We use at + building when we are talking about the normal purpose of the
building.
The browns are at the theatre. (= watching a play)
I bought these dishes at the supermarket.
Nicola is fifteen. She’s still at school.
We also use at for person’s house or flat.
I had a cup of coffee at Angela’s (house/flat).
b. On is two-dimensional. We use it for a surface.
Don’t leave your glass on the floor.
There were lots of pictures on the walls.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 287
 We also use on for a line.
Paris is on the seine.
The house is right on the main road, so it’s bit noisy.
NOTE
We also use on in this special sense.
I haven’t got any money on/with me at the moment.

c. In is three-dimensional. We use it when we see something as all around.

I had five pounds in my pocket.
Who’s that man in the green sweater?
There was a man sitting in the waiting room.
Compare in and at with buildings.
It was cold in the library. (= inside the building)
We were at the library. (= choosing a book)
NOTE
Compare these expressions with corner
There were shelves over the fireplace and a bookcase in the corner.
There’s a newsagent’s at/on the corner. You turn left there.
d. In general we use in for a country or town and at for a smaller place.
We finally arrived in Birmingham/ at Land’s End.
But we can use at with a town if we see it as a point on a journey.
You have to change trains at Birmingham.
And we can use in for a smaller place if we see it as three-dimensional.
I’ve lived in the village all my l
e. Look at these phrases.
in Spanish/Bristol
at 52 Grove Road on 42nd street (USA) in Grove Road
at your house on the third floor
at the station on the platform
at home/work/school in the lesson

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 288
 on the page in a book/newspaper
on the screen in the photo/picture
on the island in the country
at the seaside on the beach/coast
on the right/left in the middle
at the back/end of on the back of fan in the back/front of a car
a queue envelope in a queue/line/row

2. Above, over, below and under

a. Above and over have similar meanings.
There was a clock above/over the entrance.
We do not normally use above to mean horizontal movement.
The plane flew low over the houses.
And we do not use above for an area or surface.
Thick black smoke hangs over the town.
Someone had spread a sheet over the body.
NOTE
a. We prefer over before a number.
There are well over fifty thousand people in the stadium.
Both we use above with a measurement that we think of a
vertical such as temperature.
Temperatures will rise above freezing.
b. In this example over has a special meaning.
The two leaders discussed world affairs over lunch. (= while having lunch)
b. We also use over for movement to the other side, or position on the
other side of a line.
The horse jumped over the wall.
Was the ball over the goal-line?
Somehow we had to get over/across the river.
c. Below is the opposite of above; under is the opposite of over.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 289
 We met at the entrance, below/under the clock
We do not normally use below for a horizontal movement on for an
area or surface.
Mike crawled under the bed in an attempt to hide.
The town lies under a thick black cloud of smoke.

Compare below/under with above/over.

Temperatures will fall below freezing.
There are well under ten thousand people in the stadium.

3. Top and bottom

On top of is a preposition.
There’s a monument on top of the hill.

We can also use top and bottom as nouns in phrases like these.
There’s a monument at the top of the hill.
The ship sank to the bottom of the sea.

4. Through, across and along

through the gate across the road along the path

a. Through is three-dimensional. You go through a tunnel, a doorway, a crowd of

people, and so on.
The water flows through the pipe. I looked through the telescope.

b. Across is two-dimensional. You go from one side to the other across a surface such as
a lawn or a playground, or a line such as a river or a frontier.
You can get across the channel by Jefry.
Sometimes we can use either through or across, depending on whether we see
something as having three or two dimensions.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 290
 We walked through/across the field.

c. We use along when we follow a line. You go along path, a road, a passage, a route,
and so on. Compare these sentences.
We cruised along the canal for a few miles.
We walked across the canal by a footbridge.

5. To, towards and up to

We use to for a destination and towards for a direction.
We’re going to Doncaster. My aunt lives there.
We’re going towards Doncaster now. We must have taken a wrong
turning.

Go/come/walk + up to usually express movement to a person.

A man came up to me in the street and asked me for money.

NOTE
As far as means going a certain distance.
We usually try to get as far as Doncaster before we stop for coffee.

6. Near, close and by

a. Near, near to and close to mean ‘not far from’.
Motherwell is near Glasgow, NOT by Glasgow
We live near (to) the hospital/close to the hospital.

NOTE
Near (to) and close to have comparative and superlative forms.
You live nearer (to) the hospital than we do.
I was sitting closer to the door.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 291
 b. Near and close can be adverbs.
The animals were very tame, they came quite near/close.
Nearby means ‘not for away’.
There’s a post office near here/nearby.

The preposition by means ‘at the side of’ or ‘very near’

We live (right) by the hospital. Come and sit by me.

c. Next to means ‘directly at the side of’.

We live next to finish and chip shop.
At dinner I sat next to/beside Mrs. Arm strong.

7. In front of, before, behind, after and opposite

a. When we talk about where something is, we prefer in front of and behind
to before and after.
There’s statue in front of the museum, not before the museum
The police held their riot shields in front of them
The car behind us ran into the back of us. NOT the car after us

b. Before usually means ‘earlier in time’, and after means ‘later in time’. But we also
use before and after to talk about what order things come in.
J comes before K. K comes after J.

We also use after to talk about someone following or chasing.

The thief ran across the road with a policeman after him.

c. Opposite means ‘on the other side from’. Compare in front of and opposite.
People were standing in front of the theatre waiting to go in.
People were standing opposite the theater waiting to across the road.
Gerald was standing in front of me in the queue.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 292
 Gerald was sitting opposite me at lunch.

8. Between and among

a. We use between with a small number of items that we see as separate
and individual.
The ball went between the player’s legs.
Tom lives somewhere in that area between the hospital, the
university and the by- pass.

b. Among suggest a larger number.

I was hoping to spot Marcia among the crowd.
D. Preposition of time
1. At, on and in
We use these prepositions in phrase saying when.
See you at one o’clock. They arrived on Friday. We met in
1985.
a. We use at with a particular time such as o’clock time or meal time.
at half past five at breakfast (time) at that time at the moment
We also use at with holiday periods of two or three days.
at Christmas at thanksgiving at the weekend

NOTE
a. USA: on the weekend
b. We use at with someone’s age.
A sporting career can be over at thirty.

b. We use on with single day.

on Tuesday on 7th August on that day on Easter Sunday
NOTE
On can also mean ‘immediately after’.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 293
 On his arrival, the president held a press conference.

c. We use in with longer periods.

in the next few days in the summer holiday in spring
in July in 1992 in the 19th
century
We also use in with a part of the day.
in the afternoon in the mornings
But we use on if we say which day.
on Tuesday afternoon on Friday mornings on the evening of
the 12th

NOTE
An exception is at night. Compare these sentences.
I heard a noise in the night. (= in the middle of the night)
The windows are shut at night. (= when it is night)

2. Expression of time without a preposition

a. We do not normally use at, on or in in phrases of time with last, this, next,
every, later, yesterday and tomorrow.
I received the letter last Tuesday, NOT on last Tuesday
We’ve been really busy this week. NOT in this week
You can take the exam again next year. NOT in the next year
The same thing happens every time. NOT a very time
A week later I got reply. NOT in a week later
I’ll see you tomorrow morning. NOT in tomorrow morning

NOTE
a. We can use other prepositions.
After this week I shall need a holiday.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 294
 b. In informal English we can sometimes leave out on before a day.
I’ll see you Monday.
c. We do not use a preposition with these days. (= nowadays).
It’s all done by computers these days.
b. Sometimes we can use the preposition or leave it out.
Something else a bit unusual happened (on) that day.
I’d been ill (in) the previous week.
They agreed to meet (on) the following Sunday.

3. In + length of time
We can use in to say how long something takes.
Columbus crossed the Atlantic in seventy days.
Surely you can change a wheel weeks in fifteenth minutes.

We can also use in for a time in the future measured from the present.
Ella takes her exam in three weeks/in three weeks’ time.

NOTE
a. Compare these sentences.
You can walk there in half an hour. (= you need half an hour)
I’m going out in half an hour. (= half an hour from now)
b. We can also use within or inside to say how long.
I’ll be back within/inside an hour. (= in an hour or less)

4. During and over

a. We use during with an event (e.g. the festival) or a period which is a definite
time (e.g. that week). It means the whole period.
Nobody does any work during the festival/during that week.
We cannot use during + length of time.
The festival went on for a week. NOT It went on during a week.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 295
 NOTE
When something happens for the whole period, we can use throughout or all
through.
The population grew rapidly during/throughout the 19th century.
Jeremy kept staring at Naomi during/all through lunch.
b. We can also use during when something happens one or more times in the
period.
The letter arrived during the festival.
I suddenly felt ill during the show.
I have to make several trips abroad during the next few weeks.
c. During is a preposition; while is a conjunction.
Someone told me the news during the tea break.
Someone told me the news when/while we were a hundred sightings of UFOs.
d. We can also use over for a whole period of time.
Over the next few days, Simon and Kay saw a lot of each other.
Over a period of two months there were a hundred sightings of UFOs.
NOTE
The adverb over means ‘finished’.
This program will soon be over.

5. For and since

a. We use for with a period of time to say how long something continues.
Rachel plays computer games for hours on end. NOT during hours
I once stayed at that hotel for a week.
I just want to sit down for five minutes.

NOTE
We do not normally use for before a phrase with all or whole.
It rained all day/the whole day.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 296
 b. We often use for and since with the perfect to say how long something has
continued or when it started.
Giles has worked here for ten years now.
We haven’t been to the theatre for months.
We’ve been waiting for twenty minutes.
The parkers have lived here since 1985.
I haven’t seen you since September.
We’ve been waiting since twelve o’clock.

We use for + length of time and since + time when

for two years for a week for two days for a few minutes
since 1990 since last week since Monday since half past two

NOTE
a. We can sometimes leave out for in informal English.
We’ve been waiting here twenty minutes.
b. We use during for a period which is a definite time
During the last ten years Giles has been promoted at least three times.
c. Compare these sentences.
I’ve been here (for) ten minutes. I’ll stay (for) ten minutes.
I’ve been here since twenty to four. I’ll wait until four o’clock
I arrived ten minutes ago. I’m leaving in ten minutes.

c. We use the adverb ago for a past action at a time measured from the
present.
Ago comes after the length of time.
Giles joined the company ten years ago. (= ten years before now)
We last went to the theatre months ago.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 297
 d. We use the adverb before for a past action measured from the more recent past.
Giles left the company last year. He’d started work there ten years before.
(= ten years before last year)

6. Till/until and by
a. We use till/until to say when something finishes.
Jim will be working in Germany till/until next April.
We sat in the pub till/until closing-time.

NOTE
a. Till is more informal.
b. For from now to next April. But NOT He’ll be working there to next
April.
c. can us up to in a positive sentence.
He’ll be working there up to next April.
d. Till/until does not express place.
We walked to the bridge/as far as the bridge. NOT till/until the bridge
But it can be a conjunction.
We walked on till/until we got to the bridge.

b. We can use not…. till/until when something is later than expected.

Sue didn’t get up till/until half past ten.
c. By means ‘not later than’.
I’m always up by eight o’clock. (= at eight or earlier)
Can you pay me back by Friday? (= on Friday or earlier)
They should have replied to my letter by now.
Compare before.
Can you pay me back before Friday? (= earlier than Friday)

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 298
 7. From and between
a. We use from for the time when something starts.
Tickets will be on sale from next Wednesday.
From seven in the morning there’s constant traffic noise.

NOTE
Compare since with the perfect.
Tickets have been on sale since last Wednesday.

b. After the phrase with from we can use to or till/until for the time when
something finishes.
The cricket season lasts from April to September.
The road will be closed from Friday evening till/until Monday morning
NOTE Americans can use through, e.g. from Friday through Monday.

c. We can use between for a period after one time and before another.
Not many people work between Christmas and New Year’s Day.

E. Prepositions: other meanings

1. Prepositions can have meanings other than place or time.
We were talking about the weather.
According to BBC, the strike is over. (= the BBC says…)
Most people are against these changes. (= opposing)
We can have this pizza for tea. As for lunch, I’ll get a sandwich.
I’m reading a book by Irish Murdoch.
You need a pullover, so I’m knitting one for you.
You’d do anything for the sake of peace and quiet. (= in order to have)
Are you for the plan/in favor of the plane? (= supporting)
Mrs. Peterson is in charge of the department.(= head of the department)
Can I use a pencil instead of a pen?

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 299
 I went to lecture on Einstein.
On behalf of everyone here, I’d like to say thank you.
This car does at least fifty miles to the gallon.
It’s up to you to make you own decision.

2. With has these meanings.

I went to the party with a friend. (= We were together.)
Pete is the man with long hair. (= He has long hair.)
I’ll cut the wood with my electric saw.
They set to work with enthusiasm. (= enthusiastically)
With people watching, I felt embarrassed. (= Because people were watching…)

Without is the opposite of with.

Who’s the man without any shoes on?
They set to work, but without enthusiasm
NOTE
We can leave out any after without.
Who’s the man without shoes on?
But we do not normally leave out a/an after with or without. NOT I went
with friend.

3. Of has a number of different meanings.

The handle of the door a tin of soup
Some of my friends our first sight of land
We can also use of in he following pattern.
She’s an actress of great ability. (= She has great ability.)
These souvenirs are of no value.
He was a man of medium build.

4. Some prepositions have the same meaning as a conjunction.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 300
 We decided against a picnic in view of the weather.
(= because the weather was bad
Such prepositions are as well as, in addition to, beside,; in spite of, despite, ; as a result
of, in consequence of, ; because of, due to, in view of, on account of

5. We use with and by to express means.

a. We use with to talk about an instrument, a thing we use to carry out an
action.
The thieves broke the door down with a hammer.
Just stir this with a wooden spoon, could you?
By is more abstract. It refers to the means in general rather than to a
specific thing.
I paid by credit card. The motor is powered by electricity.
They broke the door down by force.
We use by before a gerund.
They got in by breaking down the door.
NOTE
a. Some passive sentences have by + agent.
The door was broken down by two men/with a hammer.
b. We say write in pen/in pencil.
b. We also use by + noun for means of transport. We do not use the.
I prefer to travel by train.
NOT travel by the train and NOT travel with the train
We can say e.g. by bike, by car/road, by taxi, by bus/coach, by in/tube/rail,
by boat/ship/ferry/hovercraft, by sea, by plane/air.
We do not use by to mean a specific bike, car etc.
I’ll go on my bike. NOT I’ll go by my bike.
We can say on my bike, in the/my car, in taxi, on the bus/train/boat/plane
etc.
On foot means ‘walking’.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 301
 I prefer to go on foot/ to walk. NOT go by foot
NOTE
Look at these examples expressing movement.
The passengers got into/out of the car/taxi.
Nancy got on/off her bike/the bus/the train.
We went on board the ship.

c. We can also use by for means of communication, e.g. by letter/post, by

phone, by telegram/telex/fax.
I spoke to Andy by phone/on the phone. I sent the information by post.

NOTE Andy isn’t on the phone= Andy hasn’t got a phone.

6. We use as to express a role or function.

Maria has come along as our guide. ( She is our guide.)
I’m having to use the sofa as my bed.
We can sometimes leave out the after as.
We use like to express a comparison.
She slapped his face. The noise was like a pistol shot.
I think Louise looks a bit like Marilyn Monroe.
Compare as and like.
He speaks as an expert. He is after all a professor.
He talks like an expert, but really he knows nothing.

NOTE
a. Like can also come in front position.
Like everyone else, I have to pay may taxes.
b. Unlike is the opposite of like.
It’s unlike Fiona to be late. She’s usually very punctual.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 302
 7. We use except (for), apart from and but to talk about an exception.
Everyone was there except (for)/apart from Nigel, who was ill.
I hate fish. I can eat anything except but fish.

F. Idiomatic phrases with prepositions

1. There are very many idiomatic phrases beginning with a preposition. Most of them are
without a/an or the. Here are some examples.
All the money paid by investors is now at risk.
Mark always drives at top speed.
I dialed the wrong number by mistake.
I’d like to buy this picture if it’s for sale.
Try to see it from my point of view.
You have to pay half the cost of the holiday in advance.
I can’t stop. I’m in a hurry.
I drive about ten thousand miles a year, on average.
Did you go there on holiday or on business?
Mr Jones is on leave this week. He’ll be in the office next Monday.
There are so many different computers on the market.
I saw it on television.
I heard it on the radio.
I’m afraid the machine is out of order.
2. These pairs are different are meaning.
a. In time (for/to) means ‘early enough’; but on time means ‘punctually’.
We arrived at the hotel in time for dinner/to have dinner.
The train left on time at 11.23.
NOTE
We arrived in good time for dinner. (= with plenty of time to spare)
We arrived just in time for dinner. (= with not much time to spare)

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 303
 b. In the end means ‘finally’; but at the end (of) means ‘when it finishes’.
There were many arguments, but in the end/at last we reached agreement.
No one wanted to go home at the end of the holiday.

NOTE
Compare in the beginning and at the beginning.
In the beginning/at first the company struggled to survive, but now
it is extremely successful.
The students return to Oxford at the beginning of the academic year.
c. In the ways means ‘blocking the way’; but on the way means ‘on a journey’.
I couldn’t get the car out. Someone had parked right in the way.
It’s a long journey. We’d better stop for a meal on the way.

Grammar 1
English Department
Page 304